4 G
L T E
S M A R T P H O N E
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
phone, and keep it for future reference.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR
ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS
OR BENEFITS.
Modification of Software
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR
CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE, SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.
IF YOUR CARRIER PROHIBITS THIS, IF YOU ATTEMPT TO DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE ONTO THE DEVICE WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION,
YOU WILL BE NOTIFIED ON THE SCREEN THAT UNAUTHORIZED SOFTWARE HAS BEEN DETECTED. YOU SHOULD THEN POWER
DOWN THE DEVICE AND CONTACT YOUR CARRIER TO RESTORE THE DEVICE TO THE CARRIER AUTHORIZED SETTINGS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SAFE™ (Samsung Approved For Enterprise)
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field
testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network
connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more
information about Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe
.
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE
FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND
THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™
DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In
addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other
things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider,
solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole
discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security
protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited
warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™
devices are sold. [101212]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC
Headquarters:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, TX 75082
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address:
©2013 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone? For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS
System (Automated Response System) at: http://www.samsung.com/us/support.
The actual available capacity of the internal memory is less than the specified capacity because the operating system and default
applications occupy part of the memory. The available capacity may change when you upgrade the device.
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
LTE is a trademark of ETSI.
and
are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under license
from SRS Labs, Inc.
, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under
license.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX
Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and
software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (tap Apps >
Settings >
More > About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more
information on how to complete your registration.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google
Hangouts, Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Devices purchased for use on AT&T's system are designed for use exclusively on AT&T's system. You agree that you won't make
any modifications to the Equipment or programming to enable the Equipment to operate on any other system. A voice plan is
required on all voice-capable devices, unless specifically noted otherwise in the terms governing your agreement. Some devices
or plans may require you to subscribe to a data plan.
Your phone is designed to make it easy for you to access a wide variety of content. For your protection, AT&T wants you to be
aware that some applications that you enable may involve the location of your phone being shared. For applications available
through AT&T, AT&T offers privacy controls that let you decide how an application may use the location of your phone and other
phones on your account. However, AT&T's privacy tools do not apply to applications available outside of AT&T. Please review the
terms and conditions and the associated privacy policy for each location-based service to learn how location information will be
used and protected.
Your phone may be used to access the Internet and to download, and/or purchase goods, applications, and services from AT&T or
elsewhere from third parties. AT&T provides tools for you to control access to the Internet and certain Internet content. These
controls may not be available for certain devices which bypass AT&T controls.
AT&T may collect certain types of information from your device when you use AT&T services to provide customer support and to
improve its services. For more information on AT&T's Privacy Policy, visit http://www.att.com/privacy
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your phone features earSmart™, an intelligent voice processor that delivers a clear voice experience, allowing you to hear and be
heard™ in nearly any environment. earSmart technology uses the science of human hearing to distinguish sounds, identify your
voice and suppress surrounding noise, for clear conversations just about anywhere.
How Does It Work?
•
•
The earSmart voice processor in your phone captures your voice and all the sounds around you.
Working like the human ear, it processes and distinguishes these sounds, isolates your voice conversation, and removes background noise •
from both ends of a call.
•
•
It also automatically equalizes and adjusts voice volume so you can hear and talk naturally, even in the noisiest places.
With earSmart technology, you can talk where you want, and have clear conversations for mobile calls, video chats, even speakerphone calls,
without worrying about surrounding noise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Section 4: Contacts and Your Address
Book .......................................................... 55
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 10: Health and Safety
Section 12: Samsung Product
Information ..............................................198
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Registration ............................................ 235
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . . . 217
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1: Getting Started
This section explains how to start using your phone by first
configuring your hardware, activating your service, and then
setting up your voice mail.
2. Lift the cover up (2) and to the right of the phone.
Setting Up Your Phone
Prior to use it is necessary to install both the battery and SIM
into their corresponding internal compartments. The
microSD™ card slot is also located in this same internal
area.
1. Remove the back cover by inserting a fingernail into
the slot on the top of your phone (1).
Caution! Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively.
Doing so may damage the cover.
Installing the SIM Card
When you subscribe to a cellular network, you are provided
with a plug-in SIM card loaded with your subscription details,
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many
others features.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important! The plug-in SIM card information and its contacts
can be easily damaged by scratching or bending,
so be careful when handling, inserting, or
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach
of small children.
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not
detect the SIM card. Re-orient the card back into the slot
if the SIM is not detected.
Installing the Battery
1. Insert the battery into the opening on the back of the
phone, making sure the connectors align (1).
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).
�
Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket
(as shown) until the card locks into place.
•
Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the phone
and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is positioned
as shown.
Correct
Incorrect
Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Removing and Installing the Memory Card
You can use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card to
expand available memory space if you desire. This secure
digital card enables you to exchange images, music, and
data between SD-compatible devices. This type of memory
card is designed for use with this mobile phone and other
devices.
Note: Your phone has been tested to support up to a 64GB
Correct
memory card.
Installing the Memory Card
Incorrect
�
Push the microSD card into the slot until it clicks (as
shown).
•
Make sure the microSD’s gold contact pins face downward and
the card is securely inserted.
Removing the Memory Card
1. Push on the memory card until it clicks and is released.
2. Grasp the memory card and remove it from the phone.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Press along the edge of the back cover (3) until you
Installing the Back Cover
1. Place the battery cover onto the back of the phone (1)
and press down (2).
have a secure seal.
Note: Make sure the battery is properly installed before
switching on the phone.
Charging a Battery
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. The
Travel Charger that is used to charge the battery, is included
with your device. Use only Samsung-approved batteries and
chargers.
Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Note: You must fully charge the battery before using your
phone for the first time. A discharged battery recharges
fully in approximately 4 hours.
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, vibrate
mode, web browser use, and other variables may
reduce the battery’s talk and standby times.
Although you can use the phone while the battery is
charging, doing so will require additional charging time.
Correct
Using the Travel Charger
Incorrect
Important! Verify that the handset battery is installed prior to
connection. If the battery is not properly installed
and the wall charger is connected, the handset
may power off and on continuously, preventing
proper operation.
1. Plug the flat end of the Travel Charger into the Power/
Accessory Interface connector and the other end into a
standard AC wall outlet.
2. When charging is finished, remove the flat end from
the interface connector jack on the phone.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can also choose to display a percentage value. Having a
percentage value on-screen can provide a better idea of the
remaining charge on the battery.
Warning! If your handset has a touch screen display, please
note that a touch screen responds best to a light
touch from the pad of your finger. Using excessive
force or a metallic object when pressing on the touch
screen may damage the tempered glass surface and
void the warranty. For more information, refer to
�
From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
My device Display Show battery percentage.
➔
➔
Switching the Phone On or Off
1. Press and hold
until the phone switches
on.
Note: Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the
battery, can cause damage to the phone.
Low Battery Indicator
When the battery is weak and only a few minutes of talk time
remain, the battery icon ( ) blinks and the device sounds a
warning tone at regular intervals. In this condition, your
phone conserves its remaining battery power, not by turning
off the backlight, but by entering the dimming mode. For a
quick check of your battery level, glance at the battery
charge indicator located in the upper-right corner of your
device’s display. Solid color ( ) indicates a full charge.
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone
automatically turns off.
2. Swipe your finger across the screen to unlock the
phone.
Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Configuring your Phone
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory.
To change the language, use the Language menu. For
When you first turn on your phone, you will need to set up a
few things.
1. The Welcome to AT&T Ready2Go! screen displays. The
default language for your phone is English. If you would
like to select another language, tap English and scroll
up or down to select one of the listed languages.
3. To switch off the phone, press and hold
until the Device options screen displays.
4. Tap Power off to switch off the phone.
,
2. Tap the Accessibility box at the bottom of the screen to
modify any of the Accessibility function if you desire.
5. At the Power off prompt, tap OK
.
Locking and Unlocking the Touch
Screen
3. Tap Next and follow the instructions on each screen to
set up your phone.
1. Press
to lock the touch screen.
2. Press
again to display the lock screen
Creating a New Google Account
then swipe your finger across the screen to unlock.
In order to utilize your device to the fullest extent, you will
need to create a Google™ Account when you first use your
device. With a Google Account, Google applications will
always be in sync between your phone and computer.
Note: Swipe is the default screen locking method. To change
If you did not create a new account during the setup
procedure when you first turned your phone on, follow these
steps:
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Gmail
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to create and
activate your account.
The Add a Google Account screen displays.
Setting Up Your Voice Mail
2. Tap New to create a new Google account.
1. From the Home screen, tap
, then tap
.
– or –
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, record a
If you already have a Google account, tap Existing to
sign in and add the account to your phone.
greeting, and record your name.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to add a Google
Note: These steps may be different depending on your
Account.
network.
Note: Once you have created a Google account, you only need
Accessing Your Voice Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap
to sign in.
, then tap
.
You may be prompted to enter a password.
Creating a Samsung Account
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the
An active Samsung account is required to begin accessing
applications such as ChatON and Samsung Hub. If you did
not create a Samsung account when you first set up your
phone, follow these steps:
voice mail center.
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
1. From the home screen, tap
Accounts Add account
Samsung account
3. Tap Create new account
➔
Settings
➔
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the
asterisk key on the phone you are using.
3. Enter your password.
➔
.
2. Tap
.
.
Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Section 2: Understanding Your Phone
This section outlines some key features of your phone and
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the phone
is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the phone and
provides information on using a memory card.
•
•
•
Smart Remote using WatchON
AT&T GPS Navigation functionality provides real-time navigation
Delivers data faster using 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access
Plus (HSPA+)
Features of Your Phone
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many
useful features. The following list outlines a few of the
features included in your phone.
•
•
•
•
Up to 64GB expandable memory slot
Corporate and Personal Email
Sync and update social network applications
Thousands of Apps available to download via Google Play Store™
and Samsung Hub
•
•
•
•
LTE network (5-6 bands) with 1.9 gigahertz quad-core processor
Android v 4.4.2, KitKat Platform
•
•
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,
Google Maps, Google Voice Search)
Brilliant 4.99” Full HD Super AMOLED display
Galaxy Gear™ compliant. For more information, please visit:
Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see
Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and
Instant Messaging with Google Hangouts™
Video with Full HD 1080p recording and playback
Samsung Link to share your media content across DLNA certified
devices
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ready access to the Internet
®
Built-in Bluetooth and advanced Wi-Fi technology
Mobile Hotspot and USB Tethering capability
13 Megapixel camera and camcorder with Front Facing camera
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Light (RGB) Sensor: lets you use the ambient light level
to adjust the screen brightness/contrast. This sensor
decreases screen brightness in dim light.
Front View of Your Phone
1
2
3
14
13
12
3. External speaker: allows you to hear the caller.
4. Application icons: you can place shortcuts to your
favorite applications on the Home screen.
5. Primary shortcuts: allows quick access to important
features such as Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet,
6. Menu key: allows you to access sub-menus with
additional options for different features and
applications such as Home screen, Phone, Contacts,
Messaging, and Web.
11
10
4
5
9
7. Home key: allows you to return to the main Home
screen from any Home screen or menu. Press and hold
to display Recent apps, Task Manager, and Google
Search. Quickly press twice to activate the S Voice
application.
6
7
8
1. Status light: displays red when charging or the battery
is low, blue when a notification has arrived or you are
voice recording, and green when fully charged.
8. Back key: allows you step backwards when navigating
a menu or web page.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
9. Home screen indicator: shows which Home screen is
presently displayed.
Side Views of Your Phone
1
7
6
10. Google Quick Search bar: a shortcut to Google Search
that allows you to search for items on the internet.
11. Weather widget: displays Time, Day, Date,
Temperature and weather conditions for your area.
12. Indicator icons: shows the information needed to
operate your phone, such as the received signal
strength, phone battery level, time, unread Emails,
missed calls, etc.
2
5
13. Front facing camera: allows you to take pictures of
yourself when you set the camera shooting mode to
Self shot.
14. Proximity and Light sensors: uses the ambient light
level to adjust keypad access. If the light path is
blocked, for example, when holding the phone close to
your ear, the touch screen will turn off.
3
4
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. 3.5mm Headset jack: allows you to plug in headphones.
2. Volume keys: allow you to adjust the ringer volume
while in standby mode or adjust the voice volume
during a call. When receiving an incoming call, briefly
7. Microphone: used for noise cancellation and stereo
recording.
Rear View of Your Phone
press down either volume key (
the ring tone. Adjusts text size when reading a
message.
) to mute
1
3
3. Microphone: allows other callers to hear you when you
are speaking to them. It is also used for the
Speakerphone.
4. Power/Accessory Interface connector: allows you to
connect a Travel Charger or other optional accessories
such as a USB/data cable or a hands-free headset for
convenient, hands-free conversations.
2
5. Power/Lock key: (
) lets you power your
phone on and off. Also allows you to lock or unlock the
touch screen. For more information on locking your
1. Camera lens: is used to take pictures and shoot videos.
2. External speaker: allows you to hear when the
Speakerphone is turned on.
6. Infrared Blaster: Used to emit infrared signals used for
controlling external devices.
3. Flash: is used to provide adequate light when taking
pictures in dark places.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17
Display Layout
Displays when there is a system error or alert.
Your display screen provides a wealth of information about
the phone’s status and options, as well as providing access
Displays to indicate a security warning. You are
prompted to set a screen lock password.
Displays when a call is in progress.
Indicator Icons
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s
display and Indicator area:
Displays when a call is on hold.
Displays your current signal strength. The greater
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.
Displays when the speakerphone is on.
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You
cannot send or receive any calls or access online
information.
Displays when a call has been missed.
Displays when a call has been muted.
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.
Displays when there is no network available.
Displays when your phone is in Blocking mode.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displays your battery charge level. Icon shown is
fully charged.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 4G LTE network.
Displays when your battery is charging. Also
displays battery charge level.
Displays when your phone is downloading or has
downloaded a file. It will blink green when it is
installing.
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in
progress.
Device Power Low – Shows your current battery
charge level.
DevicePowerCritical–Showsyourcurrentbattery
only has less than 5 percent power remaining and
will soon shutdown.
Displays when a Play Store download has
completed.
DisplayswhenyourconnectiontoanEDGEnetwork
is active.
Displays when updates are available for download.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the EDGE network.
Displays when the phone is connected to a
computer via a supported USB cable connection.
Displayswhenyourconnectionto aUTMS, HSDPA,
HSPA, or HSPA+ network is active.
Displays when the phone is tethered via a
supported USB cable connection.
Displays when a new text or multimedia message
is received.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the UTMS, HSDPA, HSPA, or HSPA+ network.
Displays when a new voice mail is received.
Displayswhenyourconnectiontoa4GLTEnetwork
is active.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
19
Displays when Email is received.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Displays in the notifications window when there
is a new Gmail message.
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point
available but you are not connected to it. May also
display if there is a communication issue with the
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displayswhenthetime anddateforaCalendarEvent
has arrived. For more information, refer to
DisplayswhenWi-FiDirectisactiveandyourphone
is connected to another device.
Displayswhenyousetanalarmtoringataspecified
Displays when your phone as been configured as a
portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Mute.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Vibrate.
Displays when Bluetooth is activated.
Displays whenGPSisactiveandacquiringa signal.
Displays when data synchronization and
application sync is active and synchronization is in
progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Displays when a Bluetooth device has been paired
with the phone.
Displays when Near Field Communication (NFC)
has been activated.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Google Search Bar
The Google Search Bar provides you an on-screen Internet
search engine powered by Google™.
1. From the main Home screen, tap the Google Search
Displayswhenyourdeviceisconnectedbeingused
to control streaming media and is connected to a
Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified
device using the Samsung Link application.
bar
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the item you want
to search for, then tap
3. Tap to use Google Voice Search. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
.
Displays when your device is currently sharing/
streaming media to a paired device using the
Samsung Link application.
.
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.
Displays when a screen capture has been taken.
Displays when the keypad is active.
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21
Terms used in this user manual
Tap
Lightly touch items to select or launch them. For example:
Menu Navigation
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs
using both menus and widgets. Menus, sub-menus, and
features can be accessed by scrolling through the available
on-screen menus. Your phone originally has three home
screens but you can expand up to seven home screens.
•
•
•
Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or text.
Tap a menu item to select it.
Tap an application’s icon to launch the application.
Command Keys
Menu Key
Touch and Hold
Activate on-screen items by a touch and hold gesture. For
example:
Press
Menu to display a context-sensitive menu of
options for the current screen or feature.
•
•
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.
Home Key
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
Press
Home to display the main Home screen. Press
Swipe and Palm Swipe
To swipe, lightly drag your finger vertically or horizontally
across the screen. Use swipe when:
and hold to display recently used apps and access the Task
manager.
Back Key
•
•
Unlocking the screen
Press
step.
Back to return to the previous screen, option or
Scrolling through the Home screen or a menu
To palm swipe, swipe the side of your hand horizontally
across the screen. Use palm swipe when:
•
Capturing the screen
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Panning
Using Motions and Gestures
By activating the various motion and gesture features, you
can access a variety of time saving functions.
To pan, touch and hold a selected icon, then move the device
to the left or right to reposition it to another page. You must
first activate Motion on your device. Use panning to:
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause
•
Move icons on your Home screens or Application Menus to
another page.
unintended results. To learn how to properly control
motions, tap
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
My
My device
Tilt
device Motions and gestures. When tapped, each
➔
To activate the tilt feature, press and hold two points on the
screen then tilt the device back and forth to reduce or
enlarge the screen. Use tilt to:
entry comes with an on-screen tutorial.
• Air gesture: Allows you to control your device by performing
motions above the sensor (without touching the device).
• Motion: Allows you to control your device using natural
movements (on the screen).
•
Reduce or enlarge the screen in the Gallery or Browser.
Turn over
Turn your phone over so that the screen faces downward. For
example:
•
• Palm motion: Allows you to control your device by touching the
screen with your entire hand.
Mute incoming calls and playing sounds by turning your phone
over.
To activate Air gesture:
1. From the Home screen, press
Settings My device
Air gesture
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of Air gesture
and then tap
➔
➔
Motions and gestures
My device
➔
.
to turn it on
.
Understanding Your Phone
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Air gesture icon
will appear in the status bar.
4. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each
feature to turn it on
.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK
.
To activate Palm Motion:
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Air gesture
1. From the Home screen, press
Settings My device
and then tap
Motions and gestures.
can be activated.
➔
➔
My device
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Palm motion
4. Tap Learn about the sensor and icon field to review
on-screen information about the Air gestures sensor
and related icon.
slider to the right to turn it on.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK
.
5. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Palm
feature to turn it on
To activate Motion:
1. From the Home screen, press
Settings My device
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of Motion to
turn it on
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK
.
motion can be activated.
4. Tap the ON/OFF slider located to the right of each
and then tap
Motions and gestures.
feature to turn it on
.
➔
➔
My device
.
Locking and Unlocking the Phone
.
To unlock your phone:
1. Press the lock button
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Motion can
located on the upper
be activated.
right side of your phone.
2. The lock screen will display with Swipe screen to
unlock displayed at the bottom of the screen.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Swipe the touch screen in any direction.
Navigating Through the Application Menus
Your phone initially has three Application Menus available.
Follow these steps to navigate through the Application
Menus:
4. The Home screen will be displayed.
Note: There are several additional ways you can lock your
1. At the Home screen, tap
. The first Application
Menu will be displayed.
2. Sweep the screen left or right to access the other two
menus.
Home Screen Overview
The main home screen is the starting point for many
applications and functions, and it allows you to add items
like application icons, shortcuts, folders, or Google widgets
to give you instant access to information and applications.
This is the default page and accessible from any menu by
3. Tap one of the application icons.
Note: As you add applications, the number of Application
menus that you have available will increase.
pressing
.
Navigating Using Sub-Menus
Sub-menus are available when you are at any Home screen
or have selected a feature or application such as Phone,
Contacts, Messaging, or Internet.
Navigating Through the Home Screens
Your phone originally has three home screens but you can
expand up to seven home screens. If you like, you can place
different applications on each of the home screens.
To access a sub-menu:
�
From the main Home screen, sweep the screen with
your finger in either direction. The main Home Screen
is located in the middle with a Home screen on each
side.
1. Press
.
A sub-menu will appear at the bottom of the phone
screen.
2. Tap an option.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25
Accessing Recently-Used Apps
Activating and Deactivating Multi window
There are two different ways you can activate and deactivate
1. Press and hold
from any screen to open the
recently-used applications window.
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.
– or –
the Multi window feature:
To activate Multi window via the Notification screen:
1. In a single motion, touch the Status bar to reveal the
Notifications tab, and then drag it to the bottom of the
screen to open the Notifications screen.
Tap
to go to the Task manager.
– or –
Tap
2. Swipe the row of icons to the left until the
Multi window icon is displayed.
to go to Google Search.
– or –
Tap
3. Tap the Multi window entry to activate the feature. The
icon turns green when active.
to delete the record of all recently used
applications.
4. Tap Home
to return to the Home screen.
5. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing
Using the Multi Window
This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the
current screen at the same time.
all the available Multi window apps.
Note: Once you have turned the Multi window option on in
step 3, you only need to press and hold the Back key
Note: Only applications found within the Multi window panel
can be active atop another current application on the
screen.
(
) to re-activate the Multi window feature.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To activate Multi window via the Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings
My device Display
To move the tab:
➔
➔
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for
approximately one-second, then slowly drag it to its
new location along the current screen edge.
My device
➔
.
2. Tap Multi window to create a checkmark and turn the
feature on.
3. Tap Home
to return to the Home screen.
Note: This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you
4. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing
can’t get to a button or option behind it.
all the available Multi window apps.
To deactivate Multi window:
To relocate the Multi window apps panel:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
�
Press and hold the Back key (
). This action hides
the Multi window tab from view.
Repositioning the Multi Window
3. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for
approximately one-second to detach it from the
screen, then slowly drag it to its new location along
either side.
The Multi window contains two components: tab and apps
panel. The tab can be manually moved across the screen.
The apps panel (containing the scrollable apps) can be
relocated to lock onto the different sides of the screen
(top/bottom/left/right).
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
27
To edit a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
Customizing the Multi Window apps
The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi
window can be organized by either being rearranged or
removed.
To rearrange the Multi window applications:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
3. Tap
More
➔
Edit (located at the bottom of
the list) to reveal a staging area (on the right) that can
house any removed applications from the Multi
window panel.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it
detaches from the panel, then carefully drag it to a new
location in the list of apps. Lift your finger or stylus off
the screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new
location.
4. Tap Done once you have completed the removal
process.
To remove a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
More - access to additional functions
3. Tap
More
➔
Edit button (located at the
Create - create a user-defined custom
bottom of the list) to reveal a staging area that can
house any removed applications from the Multi
window panel.
Create
Multi window (paired window)
Edit - edit the available Multi window apps
Edit
4. Tap Done once you have completed the removal
process.
Help - access to Help information
Help
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To restore a Multi window application:
1. Activate the Multi window feature.
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the
scrollable apps).
Note: Only applications found within the Multi-window panel
can be active atop another current application on the
screen.
When launching applications that contain multimedia
files (music/video), audio from both files will be played
simultaneously.
3. Tap
More
➔
Edit located at the bottom of
the list) to reveal the staging area containing any
previously removed apps.
4. Locate the desired application.
App #1
Border
Bar
5. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it
detaches from the staging area, then carefully drag it
to a new location in the current list of apps.
Switch
application
Close
application
Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the
same screen
Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be
run at the same time as a current on-screen app.
Switch
Fullscreen
window
Once multiple apps are running on the same screen, you can
then choose to either swap their positions or maximize a
desired app.
App #2
Drag and
drop content
In this example we will be launching both the Internet and
Maps applications.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
29
1. Launch an application such as Internet.
2. Activate the Multi window feature.
4. Scroll through the list of applications you already have
open and tap the one you wish.
The new application replaces the old one.
3. Tap the tab to display the apps panel.
4. Touch and hold the desired app, such as Maps, until it
detaches from the panel.
To switch windows: (swap the locations)
1. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom).
2. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap
5. In a single motion, drag it over the current app and
drop the new Multi window app over either the top or
bottom area of the current on-screen app.
the Border button
functions.
to show the on-screen
3. Locate and tap
Switch window. The location of
Note: Once two applications are running, the device displays a
split screen view containing both the initial app and the
new Multi window app. Each application is still
independent of the other.
the current apps are switched.
To drag and drop content:
You can drag and drop text and images in selected
applications.
To switch applications:
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap
one of the two on-screen apps to select it.
1. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom) that
you would like to switch out with another application.
2. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap
2. Tap the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.
3. Locate and tap
Drag and drop content.
the Border button
functions.
to show the on-screen
4. Drag text or images from one app and drop them in the
other app.
3. Locate and tap
Switch application
.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If an application does not support Drag and drop, then
Customizing Your Home Screen
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:
Not supported is displayed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Creating Shortcuts
To close a selected application:
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap
one of the two on-screen apps to select it.
2. Tap the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
Adding and Removing Widgets
Moving Icons in the Apps Menu
Creating Application Folders
Changing the Wallpaper
3. Locate and tap
Close application. The current app
is closed and the remaining app is maximized.
Adding and Deleting Home Screens
Moving Home Screens
To increase the size of a desired application window:
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen,
locate the Border bar indicating the edge of the app
window.
Creating Shortcuts
Shortcuts are different than the current Home screen
Widgets that only launch an application. Shortcuts activate a
feature, action, or launch an application.
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the Border bar then
drag it to resize the desired window.
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, it must
first be deleted from its current screen. Navigate to the
new screen, then add the shortcut.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
31
Adding a shortcut from the Apps Menu
Deleting a shortcut
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it
from its location on the current screen.
3. Tap
to display your current applications.
3. Drag the icon over the Remove icon
and release it.
4. Scroll through the list and locate your desired
application.
As you place the shortcut into the Trash, both items
turn red.
5. Touch and hold the application icon. This creates an
immediate shortcut of the selected icon and closes the
Apps tab.
Note: This action does not delete the shortcut, it just removes
it from the current screen.
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the
current page. Once complete, release the screen to
lock the new shortcut into its new position on the
current screen.
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the
exception of the Apps
shortcut.
Adding a shortcut via the Add to Home screen
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
2. Touch and hold the primary shortcut you want to
replace, then drag it to an empty space on any Home
screen.
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the Home screen.
4. Tap Apps and widgets Folder, or Page.
,
3. Scroll through the App menu to find the shortcut you
want to add as the new primary short cut.
4. Touch and hold the new shortcut, then drag it to the
empty space in the row of primary shortcuts.
5. Press and hold a shortcut from the available list and
position it on the current screen.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The new primary shortcut will now appear on all Home
screens.
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn
red.
Adding and Removing Widgets
Note: This action does not actually delete the Widget, it just
Widgets are self-contained applications that reside in either
your Widgets tab or on the main or extended Home screens.
Unlike a shortcut, the Widget appears as an on-screen
application.
removes it from the current Home screen.
Moving Icons in the Apps Menu
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
Adding a Widget
1. Press
2. Tap
to display your current applications.
to activate the main Home screen.
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
2. Navigate to the desired Home Page.
already selected.
3. Touch and hold on an empty area of the screen.
4. Press
and tap View type.
4. Tap Apps and widgets
.
5. Tap Customizable grid. A green circle will appear next
5. Tap the Widgets tab at the top of the screen.
6. Press and hold an available Widget to position it on the
current screen, then release the Widget.
Removing a Widget
to the option.
6. Press
and tap Edit.
7. Scroll through the list and locate the icon you wish to
move.
1. Touch and hold a Widget until you can move it around
8. Touch and drag the icon to the position that you want.
To move to a different page, drag the icon to the edge
of the page until the page scrolls to the desired page.
on the screen.
2. Drag the Widget up to the Remove icon
and
release it.
9. Tap Save
.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
33
10. Press
to return to the Home screen.
Changing the Wallpaper
You can change the Wallpaper (background) of your home
screens by following these steps:
1. From any Home screen, touch and hold on an empty
area of the screen.
Creating Application Folders
You can create application folders to hold similar applications
if you wish.
To create a folder follow these steps:
The Home screen window is displayed.
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
to display your current applications.
2. Tap
2. Tap Set wallpaper
3. Select the location where you would like to change the
wallpaper. Tap Home screen Lock screen, or Home and
lock screens
.
3. Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not
already selected.
,
.
4. Press
and tap Edit.
4. Tap one of the following options:
• Gallery: select a wallpaper from photographs you have taken
with your camera.
5. Touch and hold the first application that you would like
to move to a folder.
6. Drag the icon up to the Create folder
7. Enter a folder name and tap OK
icon.
• Live wallpapers: select an animated wallpaper. This option is
not available for the Lock screen option.
.
A folder is displayed in the original place of the
application icon with the application icon displayed on
top of it. You can now drag other Apps into the folder.
• Wallpapers: select from many still-life wallpapers.
5. Select a wallpaper and tap Set wallpaper
,
Done, or
Cancel
.
8. To view information on an App, drag the App icon up to
the App info
application.
icon to view information on the
9. Tap Save
34
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Tap OK to delete the page and its contents, otherwise
tap Cancel
7. Press
Adding and Deleting Home Screens
You can add and delete Home screens. You can have up to
seven Home screens.
.
to return to the main Home screen.
To add a new Home screen:
Moving Home Screens
You can arrange your Home screens in any order that you
want.
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
and tap Edit page
2. Press
.
3. Tap the Home screen that contains
.
To move a Home screen, follow these steps:
A new screen is added.
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
and tap Edit page
2. Press
.
4. If desired, touch and hold the new screen and drag it to
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to move.
a different location.
4. Drag it to the location that you would like to place it.
5. Press
You can now add items to your new Home screen.
To delete a Home screen:
to return to the main Home screen.
When you move a Home screen, the other Home
screens are re-ordered automatically.
5. Press
to return to the main Home screen.
1. Press
to activate the main Home screen.
and tap Edit page
Notification Bar
2. Press
.
The Notification Bar includes a pull-down list to show
information about processes that are running, recent
notifications, and alerts. To display the Status indicator:
3. Touch and hold the Home screen you want to delete.
4. Drag it to the trash can located at the top of the screen.
The page will turn red.
�
On the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
5. If there are items on the Home screen, the Remove
home screen page prompt is displayed.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35
2. Tap
then locate the Notifications panel area
Clearing Notifications
located at the bottom of the Notifications panel screen.
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired function
from the bottom two rows and then drag it to the top
two rows. Additional functions are S Beam, NFC, Air
view, Air gesture, Hands-free mode, Smart stay, Smart
pause, Smart scroll, Sync, and Airplane mode.
4. Tap Brightness adjustment to create a checkmark if you
want to be able to adjust the screen brightness via the
Notification panel.
To clear all notifications from the Notification panel:
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the Notification
Bar until the pull-down displays, then drag down
vertically.
2. Tap the Clear button.
The notifications are cleared and the panel closes.
Accessing Additional Panel Functions
In addition to notifications, the Notification panel also
provides quick and ready access to separate device
functions. These can be quickly activated or deactivated by
toggling them on or off. You can choose the functions that
will be displayed.
5. Tap
and then tap
to display only your primary
functions.
Memory Card
1. From the notification panel, tap
to display
Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC
card to expand available memory space. This secure digital
card enables you to exchange images, music, and data
between SD-compatible devices. This section addresses the
features and options of your device’s SD functionality. The
device has a USB SD card mode.
additional options.
The following functions (default) are located in the top
two rows and can either be activated (green) or
deactivated (gray): Wi-Fi, GPS, Sound, Screen rotation,
Bluetooth, Reading mode, Blocking mode, Power
saving, Multi window, and Screen Mirroring.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mounting the SD Card
SD card Available Memory Status
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
To store additional photos, music, videos, and other
applications, you must mount (install) the SD card prior to
use. Mounting the SD card establishes a USB connection
with your computer.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Storage
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
2. The available memory for Device and SD card displays
under the Total space and Available space headings.
Erasing Files from the SD card
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.
2. Your SD card is scanned to see the available
information on it.
Unmounting the SD card
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to
the SD card while removing it from the slot.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Storage
2. Tap Format SD card
3. At the Format SD card confirmation prompt, tap Format
SD card
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Storage
2. Scroll to the bottom of the display and tap Unmount SD
card
3. Tap OK
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
.
.
Warning! Performing the next step erases all data stored on
.
the SD card.
4. Tap Delete all to format or press
to cancel.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37
Entering Text Using the Samsung Keyboard
From a screen where you can enter text, rotate your phone
counterclockwise to a Landscape orientation. The on-screen
QWERTY keypad will display.
Entering Text
This section describes how to select the desired text input
method when entering characters into your phone. This
section also describes the predictive text entry system that
reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering
text.
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when
entering text.
Shift
Key
Delete
Key
Text Input Methods
There are three text input methods available:
•
•
Google voice typing: allows you to enter text by speaking.
Samsung keyboard (default): Samsung’s on-screen
QWERTY keypad that can be used in both portrait and
landscape orientation.
Voice Typing
and More Options
New
Paragraph
Space Bar
Text Input Mode
•
Swype: a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead
of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each
letter of a word.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The screen initially opens in ABC mode. After typing the
first letter, the shift key ( ) will change to
and following letters will be lowercase.
5. Tap to input another upper-case letter or tap
twice to switch to ABC mode. The shift key will
Changing the Text Input Mode - Keypad
There are two main keypad layout keys that will change the
on-screen keys within the QWERTY keypad.
The available Text Input modes are: Sym and Abc
.
Symbol/Numeric Mode: activates the number,
symbol, and emoticon keys.
change to
in ABC mode. All following letters will
be uppercase until you tap the shift key again.
ABC Mode: activates the default alphabet keys.
Can also be set to Abc or abc by using the shift
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
Use Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or
emoticons.
(
) key.
1. Rotate your phone counterclockwise to a Landscape
orientation.
Note: When in Abc mode, the Sym button will appear. When in
2. Tap
at the bottom of the screen. The following
Sym mode, the Abc/ABC/abc button will appear.
screen displays:
3. Tap the desired number, symbol, or emoticon
Using ABC Mode
characters.
1. If desired, rotate your phone counterclockwise to a
Landscape orientation.
4. Tap the
button to access additional symbols.
to return to Abc mode.
5. Tap
2. When you tap the Enter message field, the following
screen displays:
3. Tap the desired alphabetic characters.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
39
Predictive Text
Entering Text Using Handwriting
You can enter text simply by using your finger to handwrite
letters on your screen.
By using the Predictive Text option, you can have next-letter
prediction and regional error correction, which compensates
for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard.
Predictive text is turned on by default.
1. Press and hold
on the keyboard, then tap
.
1. Press and hold
on the keyboard, then tap
2. Use your finger tip to write out each character. You can
print or use cursive.
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Predictive text field, to
3. You can write out your entire message using the
.
Handwriting feature or tap
Samsung keyboard mode.
to switch back to
3. In the text portion of the message screen, begin typing
a word. A list of word options is displayed. Tap one of
the words to replace the word that has already been
typed or scroll the line of words to the left for more
word choices.
4. Continue typing your message. Tap
to send the
Note: You can also use Predictive Text mode in the portrait
orientation.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Samsung Keyboard Settings
For information on how you can configure your Samsung
Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is a text input method that allows you to enter a
word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter,
lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the
next word. Swype also includes a tapping predictive text
system.
UsingtheGoogleVoiceTypingFeature
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google voice
typing feature.
The following example shows how to enter the word “This”.
Put your finger down on the “T”, and without lifting, glide it
to the “h”, then to the “i” then over to the “s”.
1. Tap
on the keyboard.
2. At the Speak now prompt, speak clearly and distinctly
into the microphone.
3. If the red microphone turns gray, then the feature has
timed out and you should tap the microphone icon to
start again.
The text is displayed in the message as you are
speaking.
4. After you have quit speaking for several seconds, tap
to return to the keyboard.
Note: The feature works best when you break your message
down into smaller segments.
Understanding Your Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41
•
•
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter
contractions.
Enabling and Configuring Swype
The Samsung keyboard is the default text input method, so
to use Swype, you must first change the default keyboard
setting.
Double-tap on the word you want to change to correct a
misspelled word, then tap the delete key to erase one character.
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.
To enable Swype:
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and
drag
down from the Notifications area then tap
Select input method
.
2. Tap the Swype radio button. It will turn green.
The Swype keyboard is displayed.
Swype Settings
For information on how you can configure your Swype
Swype Text Entry Tips
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video
or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following
Swype text entry tips.
•
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such
as pp in apple).
•
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a
selection.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3: Call Functions
This section describes how to make or answer a call. It also
includes the features and functionality associated with
making or answering a call.
Making an International Call
1. From the Home screen, tap
, then touch and hold
+
0
. The + character appears.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,
Displaying Your Phone Number
area code, and phone number.
•
If you make a mistake, tap
have been deleted.
until the desired numbers
�
Tap
➔
Settings
➔
More
➔
About device
➔
Status. Your phone number is displayed in the My
phone number field.
3. Tap
to make the call.
Making a Call
Manual Pause Dialing
To manually call a number with pause(s) without storing it in
your Contacts list:
1. From the Home screen, tap
and use the on-screen
keypad to enter the number you wish to dial.
1. From the Home screen, tap
and use the on-screen
2. Tap
to make the call.
keypad to enter the phone number.
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Voice Call
menu, the phone will automatically redial up to 10 times
when the person does not answer the call or is already
2. Press
to display the dialer sub-menu.
3. Tap Add 3-sec pause to add a three second pause, and
use the keypad to enter the additional numbers.
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by
entering multiple three second pauses.
Call Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
43
4. Select Add wait to add a wait. A wait will pause the
calling sequence until you enter a number or press a
key.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
3. Tap the desired Contact to enter the Details page, then
tap
to make a call.
5. Tap
to make the call.
Making Emergency Calls
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn
on the phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message
displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install
the SIM card.
Correcting an Entered Number
Use the following steps to correct a mis-typed entry when
dialing.
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call
with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available.
Making an Emergency Call without a SIM card
1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make
an emergency call.
�
After entering a number using the keypad:
•
•
If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character.
Press and hold to erase the entire string of numbers.
Ending a Call
Tap the
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap
. Complete your call. During
�
key.
this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker
mode, Keypad, and End Call features.
Dialing a Recent Number
All incoming, outgoing and missed calls are recorded in the
Call log. If the number or caller is listed in your Address
Book, the associated name is also displayed.
3. Tap
to exit this calling mode.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap the Logs
tab.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making an Emergency Call with a SIM card
4. The Speed dial setting screen displays showing the
numbers 1 through 100. The number 1 is reserved for
Voicemail.
The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency
number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal
calling operations, you should first exit this mode.
5. Tap an unused number and the Select contact screen
displays.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Enter the emergency number (example: 911) and then
tap
.
6. Tap a contact to assign to the number. The selected
contact number will display in the speed dial number
box.
.
3. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will
have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End
Call features.
7. To remove a speed dial number or change the order,
press
8. Tap Change order or Remove
9. To make a call using Speed Dial, tap
to display the Speed dial setting sub-menu.
.
Note: This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly
➔
Keypad
than normal calling mode.
and from the Dialer, touch and hold the speed dial
number. If the speed dial number is more than 1 digit
long, enter the first digits, then hold the last digit.
Making a Call Using Speed Dial
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in your
Contacts List for speed dialing.
Making a Call from the Address Book
You can store phone numbers that you use regularly on the
SIM card or in the phone’s memory. These entries are
collectively called the Address Book.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
to display
your Contacts List.
2. Press
to display the Contacts List sub-menu.
3. Tap Speed dial setting
.
Call Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
45
Answering a Call
When a call is received the phone rings and displays the
caller’s phone number, or name if stored in the Address
Book.
Note: You can answer a call while using the Address Book or
other menu feature. After ending the call, the phone
returns to the previously active function screen.
1. At the incoming call screen:
Dialing Options
•
•
Touch and drag
Touch and drag
in any direction to answer the call.
in any direction to reject the call and
From the Home screen and Application menus, you have the
option to access the Dialer and initiate a call by tapping
send it to your voicemail.
➔
Keypad. From the Dialer and the Contacts screen, the
following tabs are located at the top of your screen:
•
Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and
tap a predefined text message to send to the caller.
•
Keypad: dials the current number entered using the on-screen
keypad.
–
–
–
–
–
I’m driving
•
•
Logs: displays a list of all dialed, received, and missed calls.
Favorites: displays your contacts that you have marked as
Favorites.
I’m at the movie theater
I’m in class
I’m in a meeting
•
Contacts: takes you to your Address Book where you can select a
contact to call.
Sorry, I’m busy. Call back later.
– or –
After you begin to enter numbers, the Add to contacts option
appears so you can save the Contact if needed.
–
Tap Create new message to compose a new message.
to end the call.
2. Tap
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calling Back a Missed Call
To call back a missed call number:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Call Log
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,
received, or missed in the Call log. The Call log displays the
details of the call.
➔ Logs
.
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap the Logs tab.
.
A list of recent calls is displayed. If the number or caller
is listed in your Address Book, the associated name is
displayed.
2. Swipe the desired missed call to the right to call.
– or –
Swipe the desired missed call to the left to message.
All calls made, received, and missed are listed. Types of calls
are identified by the following icons:
Saving a Recent Call to your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Logs
.
•
•
•
•
•
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
Rejected Calls
Auto Rejected Calls
:
A list of recent calls is displayed.
:
2. Tap the call you want to save to your Address Book.
3. The call detail page is displayed. Tap Create contact to
add the call to your Address Book.
:
The Create contact screen is displayed.
:
– or –
:
If you want to replace the number for an existing
contact, tap Update existing
.
Call Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
47
3. At the Message screen, tap the empty text field and
Delete log entry
use the on-screen keypad to type in a message.
Add as new
contact
Update an existing
contact
4. When you are done with your message, tap
to
send.
Call the number
Send a message
Deleting a Call from the Call Log
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Logs
.
A list of recent calls is displayed.
2. Touch and hold the call you want to delete from the Call
log.
4. Enter information into the various fields using the
keypad.
3. Tap Delete.
4. At the Delete log prompt, tap Delete
.
5. Tap Save to save when you are finished.
The call is deleted from the Call log.
Adding a Call to the Reject List
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Logs
.
Sending a Message to a Recent Call
A list of recent calls is displayed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Logs
.
2. Touch and hold the call you want to add to the Reject
A list of recent calls is displayed.
List.
2. Swipe the entry you want to message to the left.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap Add to reject list.
Options During a Call
4. At the Add to reject list prompt, tap OK
.
Your phone provides a number of control functions that you
can use during a call.
Future calls from this number will be rejected and sent
to your voicemail.
Adjusting the Call Volume
During a call, to adjust the volume, use the Volume keys on
the left side of the phone.
Call Duration
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press Call duration
➔ Logs
.
�
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level
➔
.
and press the Down volume key to decrease the
volume level.
– or –
3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:
• Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.
• Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.
• Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls
received.
Quickly add more volume to the incoming audio by
tapping the on-screen Extra volume button
.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ringer volume
using these same keys.
• All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and
received.
4. You may reset these times to zero by pressing
then tapping Reset
.
Call Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
49
•
•
Headset connects to a Bluetooth headset.
In-Call Options
During an active call there are several functions available by
tapping a corresponding on-screen button.
–
Tap Headset during a call to activate a Bluetooth headset. A
green line will appear under the Headset button.
–
Tap Headset again to de-activate the Bluetooth headset. The
green line will disappear when the Headset is not activated.
•
•
•
Hold: place the current active call on hold.
Add call: displays the dialer so you can call another person.
Keypad: displays the on-screen keypad, where you can
enter number using DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency).
End call: terminates the call.
Press
for more options:
–
–
–
Contacts: allows you to go to your Contact list.
Memo: allows you to write a memo.
Message: allows you to write a message during a call.
•
•
Speaker: routes the phone’s audio through either the speaker or
through the earpiece.
Personalizing the Call Sound Setting
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the
incoming call by selecting an audio equalizer setting for the
current call.
–
Tap Speaker to route the audio through the speaker. (You can
adjust the speaker volume using the volume keys.) A green line
will appear under the Speaker button.
1. From the call screen, tap
.
–
green line will disappear when Speaker is not activated.
2. Confirm the option is enabled
.
3. Select an available option. Choose from: Adapt Sound,
•
Mute/Unmute turn the onboard microphone either on or off.
Soft sound, Clear sound, and Off.
–
Tap Mute during a call to mute the microphone. A green line
will appear under the Mute button.
–
Tap Mute again to unmute the microphone. The green line will
disappear when Mute is not activated.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once connected, the active call will appear in a large
box at the top of your screen and the call on hold will
appear in a smaller box in the middle of your screen.
Activating Noise Reduction
During a call it may be necessary to activate the noise
reduction feature. Activating this feature can improve the
quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise.
Noise reduction in on by default.
Switching Between Calls
When you have an active call and a call on hold, you may
switch between the two calls, changing the one on hold to
active and placing the other on hold.
1. Press
to turn Noise reduction off
to turn Noise reduction on
.
2. Press
.
Placing a Call on Hold
1. Tap Swap.
You can place the current call on hold at any point during a
conversation. You can also make another call while you have
a call in progress if your network supports this service.
Hold
The current call (caller #2) is placed on hold and the
previous call on hold (caller #1) is then reactivated so
that you can continue conversing with that person. The
active call will appear in a green box.
1. While on a call, tap Hold
. This action places
the current caller on hold.
2. Tap
to end the currently active call.
2. You can later reactivate this call by tapping Unhold
To end a specific call
1. Tap Swap until the call you want to end appears in a
Unhold
.
To make a new call while you have a call in progress
green box.
Hold
1. Tap Hold
.
2. Tap
to end the specific call.
2. Tap Add call
to display the dialer.
3. Tap
to end the remaining call.
3. Enter the new number and tap
.
Call Functions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
51
To answer a call while you have a call in progress
3-Way Calling (Multi-Party Calling)
You can answer another call while you have a call in progress
if you have activated your Call waiting feature. Otherwise, the
other call will go to your Voicemail box. For more information,
The 3-Way or Multi-Party feature allows you to answer a
series of incoming calls and place them on hold. If this
service is supported by the network, all calls can be joined
together. You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
1. Tap
and slide to the right to answer another call.
2. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call
Note: The Merge option combines all of the calls you have
established with your phone (both active and on hold).
Swap places the current call on hold and then activates
the previous call.
on hold.
– or –
Tap Ending call with "Name/Number" to end the first
call.
This feature joins all of the calls you have established with
your phone (both active and on hold) into a multi-party call.
3. To switch between the two calls, tap Swap.
• Swap: Places the current call on hold and then activates the
previous call. The active call will appear in a green box. Tap
Swap again to switch back.
1. Tap
and slide to the right to answer the call.
2. Tap
and slide to the right to answer the next call.
To end a call on hold
1. Tap
to disconnect the active call.
2. The call on hold will now become the active call. Tap
to end the call.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap Putting "Name/Number" on hold to put the first call
on hold.
Switching off the Microphone (Mute)
You can temporarily switch your phone’s microphone off, so
4. Join the first two callers into a single multi-party call by
that the other person cannot hear you.
tapping Merge
.
Merge
Example: You wish to say something to person in the room,
but do not want the person on the phone to hear
you.
5. To temporarily leave the conference call, tap Hold
Hold
.
Unhold
To rejoin the conference call tap Unhold
.
To mute your phone during a call
6. Tap
to end the call.
1. Tap Mute
.
Mute
Using the Speakerphone During an Active Call
While in an active call, it is possible to enable the
speakerphone feature.
The Mute button now appears as
activated.
and Mute is
Mute
2. Tap Mute
to deactivate the Mute function and
1. Tap Speaker
.
Mute
Speaker
reactivate the microphone.
The Speaker button now appears as
and the
Speaker
Bluetooth headset
1. Tap Headset
speakerphone is activated.
.
Headset
2. Use the Volume keys (located on the left side of your
2. The phone will scan for your Bluetooth headset. When
phone) to adjust the volume.
found, connect to the headset.
3. To deactivate the speakerphone, tap Speaker
.
Speaker
The Headset button now appears as
and the
Headset
Bluetooth headset is activated.
3. Tap Headset
and reactivate the phone speaker.
Call Functions
to deactivate the Bluetooth headset
Headset
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Forward when busy allows you to forward voice calls to a
designated number instead of your voice mail number if you
are on another phone call.
Searching for a Number in Address Book
1. During the active call, press
then tap Contacts.
2. Tap the Address Book entry.
• Forward when unanswered: allows you to forward voice calls
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number
when there is no answer on your phone. You can also select
the amount of time that the phone delays before forwarding.
• Forward when unreachable: allows you to forward voice calls
to a designated number instead of your voicemail number
when you are not in an area covered by your service provider or
when your phone is switched off.
Call waiting
The Call Waiting feature allows you to answer an incoming
call while you have a call in progress, if this service is
supported by the network, and you must first activate the
Call Waiting feature:
�
From the Home screen, tap
➔
➔
Call settings
Call Settings
➔
Additional settings Call waiting.
➔
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting
tone.
To access the Call settings menu:
�
From the Home screen, tap
➔
➔
➔
Call
settings
– or –
.
Call forwarding
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
➔
Call settings
➔
Additional settings
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Always forward: allows you to forward all voice calls.
➔
Call forwarding
.
�
From the Home screen, tap
My device Call
Settings
➔
My device
➔
.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4: Contacts and Your Address Book
This section allows you to manage your daily contacts by
storing their name and number in your Address Book.
Address Book entries can be sorted by name, entry, or group.
You can also manage your Address Book on the web
.
Synchronizing your AT&T Address Book
If you ever upgrade, damage, or lose your phone, you can
easily restore your contacts onto your new phone by
following these steps:
AT&T Address Book Activation
When you access the AT&T Address Book, the network
backup service, contacts are automatically synchronized
between your phone and online address book. The changes
you make are automatically saved and if you ever upgrade,
damage, or lose your phone, you can easily restore your
contacts onto your new phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
2. Press Settings AT&T Address Book
3. At the AT&T Address Book screen, tap Yes to
.
➔
➔
.
synchronize your phone with your online Address Book.
4. If there are existing contacts on your phone, you will be
prompted if you would like to remove them first. Tap
To activate the AT&T Address Book:
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
Your Address Book is displayed.
Yes or No
.
2. If you have not synchronized your phone with your
online AT&T Address Book recently, the AT&T Address
Book screen is displayed. Tap Start Sync if you want to
synchronize your Address Book.
Note: You must first copy any contacts that exist on your SIM
card to your phone. For more information, refer to
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Your phone is synchronized.
Your AT&T Address Book is Ready to Use. You can now make
a call or send a message through your Address Book.
Contacts and Your Address Book
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55
5. At the Your AT&T Address Book is Ready for Use prompt,
tap OK
• Remove: although not an option with a new entry, deletes any
previously assigned image on an existing contact.
4. Tap the Name field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter the full name. For more information, refer to
“Entering Text” on page 62.
.
Your Contact list is displayed.
Adding a New Contact
Use the following procedure to add a new contact to your
Address Book.
– or –
Tap
next to the Name field to display additional
Saving a Number from the Home screen
name fields.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔
.
5. Tap the Phone number field.
The numerical keypad is displayed.
Mobile
2. At the Save contact to prompt, tap on Device SIM, or
,
Account name.
3. Tap the image icon and assign a picture to the new
The Mobile button
initially displays next to the
entry by choosing one of three options:
• Image: retrieve a previously stored image from your Gallery or
from your My files folder and assign it to this entry. Tap an
Phone number field. If you want to add a phone number
that is not a mobile number, tap the Mobile button and
select from Mobile, Home, Work, Work fax, Home Fax,
Pager, Other, Custom (add your own label), or Callback.
image to assign the image to the contact, then tap Done
.
• Pictures by people: retrieve a previously shared image from
your Gallery.
6. Enter the phone number.
Tap
to add another Phone number field or tap
• Take picture: use the camera to take a new picture and assign
to delete a field.
it to this entry, then tap Done
.
7. Tap the Email address field.
• S Memo: use an image from one of your S Memos.
The keyboard is displayed.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Home
The Home button
initially displays next to the
Adding Pauses to Contact Numbers
Email field. If you want to add an Email address that is
not a Home email address, tap the Home button and
select another Email address type.
When you call automated systems, you are often required to
enter a password or account number. Instead of manually
entering the numbers each time, you can store the numbers
in your Contacts along with special characters called pauses
and waits. A pause will stop the calling sequence for two
seconds and a wait will pause the calling sequence until you
enter a number or press a key.
8. Enter the Email address.
Tap
to add another Email address field or tap
to delete a field.
9. Tap any of the following fields that you want to add to
your new contact:
To add a pause or a wait to an existing Contact:
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
, and then tap
• Groups: assign the contact to Not assigned, Favorites, ICE -
emergency contacts, Co-workers, Family, or Friends.
• Ringtone: adds a field used to assign a message tone that will
sound when messages are received from this contact.
• Message alert: allows you to set the ringtone for your
message alerts.
the name or number to open the Contact.
2. Tap
to edit.
3. Tap the phone number field.
4. Tap the screen at the position where the pause or wait
needs to be added.
5. Tap
.
• Vibration pattern: allows you to set the specific type of
vibration.
6. Tap Pause to add a two-second pause or tap Wait to
add a wait, and use the keypad to enter the additional
numbers. A pause will be displayed as a comma (,) and
a wait will be displayed as a semi-colon (;).
7. Tap Save to save your changes, or tap Cancel to
discard.
• Add another field
:
tap this button to add additional fields.
10. Tap Save to save the new contact.
Contacts and Your Address Book
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
57
Finding an Address Book Entry
Editing an Existing Contact
When editing an existing contact, you can tap a field and
change or delete the information, or you can add additional
fields to the contact’s list of information.
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding
names onto your SIM card and phone’s onboard memory.
The two locations are physically separate but are used as a
single entity, called the Address Book.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
Depending on your particular SIM card, the maximum
number of phone numbers the SIM card can store and how
they are stored may differ.
2. Tap the Contact that you want to edit.
3. Tap
to edit.
4. Tap any of the fields to add, change, or delete
information.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
2. Within the Contacts list (sorted alphabetically), tap a
letter on the right side of the display to quickly jump to
the contacts beginning with that letter.
5. Tap Save to save the edited information.
Using Contacts
Dialing or Messaging from Address Book
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can dial them easily and quickly by either using their SIM
card location number or by using the Search field to locate
the entry.
3. Tap the contact you wish to call or message.
4. Tap the phone icon to make a phone call or tap the
message icon to send a message.
From the Address book, you can also send messages.
Tip: From the Contact list, sweep right over a listing to make a
call. Sweep left over a listing to send a message.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information about synchronizing accounts, see
Linking Contacts
Linking Contact Information
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
Many people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to
another entry). Note: typically this is the same contact
with a different name or account information.
3. Press
➔
Link contact.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts such as
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Corporate email, and Google.
When you synchronize your phone with these accounts, each
account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.
The contact list is displayed.
Note: Only contacts stored on your phone can be linked.
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to
link). The second contact is now linked with the first
and the account information is merged into one screen.
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith, for example) has a
regular email account that you maintain in Gmail, but also
has a Facebook account under her maiden and married
name, as well as a Yahoo! chat account, when you merge
these accounts into your Contacts list you can link all of her
entries and view the information in one record.
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but
displays in one record for easier viewing when you link
the contacts.
The next time you synchronize your phone with your
accounts, any updates that contacts make to email account
names, email addresses, etc. automatically update in your
contacts list.
Contacts and Your Address Book
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
59
5. Tap the link icon
under the Connection bar to
Marking a Contact as Default
view the contact information you joined. The contacts
and information displays with an icon next to the
contact name to indicate what type of account
information is contained in the entry.
When you use messaging type applications, the application
needs to know which information is primary (default) in a
contact entry list. For example, you may have three different
contact records for John Smith, so the application will be
looking for the “default” number or entry.
Unjoining a Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
.
2. Tap a Contact name.
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you
want to unlink an entry). Note: typically this is the same
contact with a different name or account information.
3. Press
➔
Mark as default. The Mark as default
screen displays radio buttons next to the contact
names or phone numbers of all the linked contacts.
The radio button next to the default contact will be
green.
3. Tap the link icon
4. Tap the minus sign
want to unjoin.
under the Connection bar.
next to entry in which you
4. To change the default contact, tap the radio button next
to another entry that you want to be the default. The
5. At the Separate contact prompt, tap OK
.
The contact is now separated and no longer displays in
the merged record screen.
radio button will turn green, then tap Done
.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Synchronizing Accounts
Note: You can also synchronize your accounts using the
Settings menu. For more information, refer to
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts
list.
Address Book Options
You can access Address Book options while at the main
Address Book page or while in the details page for a specific
entry.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
2. Press then tap Accounts
.
.
Options in Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
If you have previously added any accounts, the Sync
settings prompt is displayed with your current accounts
listed.
then press
.
2. The following options are displayed:
3. Tap an account that you would like to synchronize.
4. At the Sync settings screen, tap the options that you
would like to synchronize for that account.
5. Tap Sync now to synchronize the account.
The account is synchronized.
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
• SIM Management: allows you to copy contacts from your
phone to your SIM card or from your SIM card to your phone.
You can also delete contacts from your SIM.
• Import/Export: allows you to move contacts to or from your
memory card or USB storage.
6. Press
to return to the Contacts list.
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s
information via various applications.
Contacts and Your Address Book
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
61
• Accounts: allows you to add and manage your Samsung,
ChatON, Google, LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol),
and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts. Tap Add account
and then follow the on-screen instructions.
–
–
Contact sharing settings: allows you to send all or individual
contacts via Bluetooth in the form of namecards.
AT&T Address Book: allows you to access the AT&T Address
Book so you can sync your contacts.
• Help: provides additional information on using your contacts.
Options at Selected Contact Screen
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
• Send message/email: allows you to send a text or message.
• Contacts to display: You can choose to display all of your
contacts or only display contacts on your Phone, SIM, or
contacts stored to other accounts. You can also tap Customized
list to change other options on how your contacts are displayed.
• Settings: allows you to choose set the following options:
2. Tap a contact and at the contact’s display screen, press
.
3. The following options are displayed:
• History: allows you to view the phone and message history for
the contact.
• Edit: allows you to edit the contact’s information.
• Delete: allows you to delete the contact from your Address
Book.
–
Only contacts with phones: allows you to only display
contacts that have phone numbers.
–
–
List by: allows you to sort by First name or Last name.
Display contacts by: allows you to sort by First name or Last
name first.
• Link contact: allows you to link contacts with other contacts.
• Separate contact: allows you to separate contacts that have
been linked. This option only appears if the contact has been
linked.
–
Service numbers: allows you to display or edit your service
numbers.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Mark as default: when you have multiple contacts linked
together, you can mark one of them as default (only displays
when contact is saved to the phone). For more information,
• Assign speed dial: allows you to assign this contact to your
3. Tap
to edit.
4. Tap Groups
.
5. Tap the group that you would like to add the contact to.
You may select as many groups as you like.
6. Tap Save
.
7. After returning to the main edit screen, tap Save again.
The contact is added to the group.
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the contact’s
information via various applications.
Removing a Contact From a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
Groups
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press Remove member
➔
• Add to/Remove from reject list: allows you to add or remove
the contact from your reject list. If they call while being on the
reject list, the call will be sent directly to voice mail.
• Add shortcut to home: allows you to place a shortcut for this
contact on your Home screen.
.
Groups
➔
.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this
group. A green checkmark will appear next to their
name.
Groups
Adding a Contact to a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
5. Tap Done
.
.
The contacts are now removed from the group.
2. Tap the Contact that you want to add to a group.
Contacts and Your Address Book
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Tap Done
.
Creating a New Group
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔
Groups
9. Tap Save to save the new Group category.
➔
➔
Create.
Groups
Editing a Caller Group
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as
part of the selected group.
2. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a new group name. For more
information, refer to “Entering Text” on page 62.
3. Tap Group ringtone to choose a ringtone for assignment
to this new group. Tap a ringtone to hear how it
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔
Groups
.
Groups
2. Tap a group entry.
sounds, then tap OK
.
3. Press
➔
Edit group.
– or –
4. Make modifications to the Group name Group ringtone,
,
Tap Add to select a ringtone from your music files.
or Vibration pattern fields.
4. Tap Message alert to choose an alert tone for
5. Tap Add member to add more contacts to this group.
6. Tap Done
assignment to this new group, then tap OK
.
.
5. Tap Vibration pattern to choose a vibration audio file for
7. Tap Save to save the edited Group category.
assignment to this new group, then tap OK
– or –
.
Address Book Favorites
Once you have stored phone numbers in the Address Book,
you can add them to your Favorites list.
Tap Create and follow the on-screen instructions to
create your own vibration pattern.
To view your Favorites list:
6. Tap Add member to add contacts to the new group.
�
From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔
Favorites
7. Tap each contact you want to add to create a
.
Favorites
checkmark. You can also tap Select all
.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Favorites to your Address Book
Managing Address Book Contacts
You can copy, delete, and view the memory status for the
Phone and SIM contacts on your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔
Favorites
.
Favorites
2. Press
➔
Add to favorites.
Copying Contacts to the SIM Card
3. When the Contacts list is displayed, tap a contact that
you want to add to your favorites list. You may select
more than one.
Note: When storing an Address Book entry into the SIM card,
only the name, phone number, and email address are
available as fields. Also, if you move the SIM card to
another phone that does not support additional fields on
the SIM card, this additional information may not be
available.
4. Tap Done
.
5. A gold star will appear next to the contact image in the
Address Book.
Removing Favorites from your Address Book
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
SIM Management
2. Tap Copy Contacts to SIM
➔
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
.
2. Within the Contacts list, tap a contact that you want to
remove from your favorites list. Contacts in your
Favorites list will have a gold star.
.
The phone then displays a list of your current phone
contacts.
3. Tap the gold star in the top right corner of the display.
4. The gold star will change to a white star and the
contact is removed from your Favorites list. It will no
longer appear next to the contact image in the Address
Book.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have copied to the SIM card.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
Contacts and Your Address Book
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
65
4. Tap Done to copy.
Deleting Contacts from the SIM card
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
5. At the Copy to SIM display, tap OK
.
➔
➔
SIM Management
.
The selected numbers are copied to the SIM card.
2. Tap Delete Contacts from SIM
.
Copying Contacts to the Phone
The phone then displays a list of your current SIM
contacts.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
➔
➔
SIM Management
.
3. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
those entries you wish to have deleted from the SIM
card.
2. Tap Copy Contacts from SIM
.
3. At the Create contact under account prompt, tap on
Device or an account name that you would like to copy
the contact to.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to the
SIM or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
The phone then displays a list of your current contacts
stored on your SIM card.
4. Tap Delete
.
4. Tap the contacts to place a checkmark adjacent to
5. At the Delete Contacts from SIM prompt, tap OK
.
those entries you wish to have copied to your phone.
The selected numbers are deleted from the SIM card.
•
Repeat this step for all individual entries you wish copied to
your phone or tap Select all to place a checkmark alongside all
entries.
Deleting Address Book Entries from the Phone
You can delete Phone or SIM entries from your phone’s
5. Tap Done to copy.
memory.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
.
The selected numbers are copied.
2. Within the Contacts list, touch and hold a contact that
you want to delete.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap Delete on the displayed list.
4. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete the contact or
Cancel to exit.
Using the Service Dialing Numbers
You can view the list of Service Dialing Numbers (SDN)
assigned by your service provider. These numbers may
include emergency numbers, customer service numbers, and
directory inquiries.
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
Settings
2. Tap Service numbers
➔
➔
.
.
3. Scroll through the available numbers (if available).
4. Tap a number and the call is made.
Note: This menu is available only when your SIM card
supports Service Dialing Numbers.
Contacts and Your Address Book
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
67
Section 5: Multimedia
This section explains how to use the camera on your phone.
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-
in camera functionality. Your 13 megapixel camera produces
photos in JPEG format.
1. From the main Home screen, tap
➔
Camera
to activate the camera mode.
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up
to x4 (400 percent).
Important! Do not take photos of people without their
permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are
not allowed.
– or –
Do not take photos in places where you may
interfere with another person’s privacy.
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to
zoom in.
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap
on-screen icons to access various camera options and
settings.
Using the Camera
Taking Photos
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then
pressing the camera key.
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to the
area you touch.
6. Press the Camera key ( ) until the shutter sounds.
(The picture is automatically stored within your
designated storage location. If no microSD is installed,
all pictures are stored on the Phone.)
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taking Dual Camera Photos
With the Dual Camera feature, you can take a picture with
both the front and rear cameras at the same time.
Front
Facing
Camera
Dual Camera
Camera Mode
Record
Quick Settings
To take a Dual Camera picture:
Video
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Dual Camera icon
located at the top left side of the screen.
The camera viewfinder displays an image from the
front-facing camera within a postage stamp picture
frame on top of the main image displayed from the
rear-facing camera.
Take
Picture
Change
Mode
Image
Viewer
(Gallery)
Viewfinder
Effects
2. Press the Camera key ( ) to take the picture.
7. While viewing a picture, after you have taken it, pinch
the screen outwards to zoom in or pinch the screen
inwards to zoom out.
To resize the front camera image:
�
Touch and hold the postage stamp picture frame until
the resize handles appear, then drag a corner to
enlarge the image.
You can magnify the picture up to x4.
8. Press
to return to the viewfinder.
To reposition the front camera image
�
Touch and hold the postage stamp picture frame to
detach it and then move it to a desired location.
Multimedia
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
–
Sound & shot: Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding
background sounds for a few seconds. The background sound
is recorded for up to 9 seconds after taking the photo.
Drama: Use this to take a series of photos of a moving object
and then merge them together into one image.
Animated photo: Use this to create a picture in which a few
selected static objects move by animating objects detected by
the device.
Camera Modes
There are many different camera modes that you can use to
help optimize your photos depending on the conditions and
your experience.
–
–
MODE
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Mode button
to change the mode to one of the following:
–
–
–
Auto: Automatically adjusts your camera to optimize color and
brightness. This is the default setting
Beauty face: Use this to take photos with lightened faces for
gentler images.
–
–
–
Rich tone (HDR): Use this to take photos with richer colors and
contrasts.
Best photo: Use this to take multiple photos in a short time,
and then choose the best photos among them. Press the
Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap
and hold thumbnails of photos to save, and then tap Done.
Best face: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same
time and combine them to create the best possible image. Press
the Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens,
tap the yellow frame on each face, and choose the best
individual face for the subject. After choosing a pose for each
individual, tap Done to merge the images into a single photo,
and tap Save.
Eraser: Saves the best of 5 taken pictures and removes any
passers by.
Panorama: Use this to take wide panoramic photos. Press the
Shutter button to take a photo, and then move the camera in
any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the preview
screen, the camera automatically takes another shot in the
panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, press the Shutter button
again.
–
–
Sports: Use this to take fast action photos.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
–
Night: Use this to take photos in low-light conditions, without
using the flash. Press the Shutter button to take multiple photos.
Photos are automatically merged into a single photo.
Camera and Camcorder Settings
This section describes the different settings that you can
configure on your camera. Not all of the following options are
available in both still camera and video camera modes. The
available options vary by mode.
Quick Settings
Tap
at the top of the display to quickly change
1. From the viewfinder, tap
Camera Settings).
(Quick Settings) ➔
Camera settings. Not all of the following options are available
in both still camera and video camera modes. The available
options vary by mode.
(
2. The follow settings are located under the Camera,
Camcorder, and General tabs. The settings that are
displayed will depend on what camera mode you are
in.
Configure Camera settings.
Activate or deactivate the flash.
Camera
:
Use this to activate or deactivate night detection.
Activate or deactivate the voice control to take photos.
Select a resolution for videos.
• Photo size: Select a resolution for photos. Use higher
resolution for higher quality. Higher resolution photos take up
more memory.
• Burst shot: allows several photographs to be captured in quick
succession by touching and holding the Camera button.
• Face detection: allows you to adjust the camera focus based
on face detection technology.
Activate or deactivate the sharing options.
Hide Quick settings.
Multimedia
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Metering modes: allows you to set how the camera measures
or meters the light source: Center-weighted, Matrix, or Spot.
• ISO: determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital
camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800. Use a
lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light, a
higher ISO number to take photos with less light, or Auto to let
the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.
• Anti-shake: compensates for camera movement.
• Auto night detection: activates or deactivates the night
detection feature.
Settings:
• Location tag: attach a location tag to the photo. To improve
GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may
be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas,
or in poor weather conditions. Your location may appear on
your photos when you upload them to the Internet. To avoid
this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.
• Review pics/videos: set this option if you want to view each
picture or video after you take it.
• Volume key: assigns a function to the volume key. Choose
from The zoom key, The camera key, or The record key.
• Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. You can set the timer to
Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.
• Save as: allows you to assign rich tone usage to an image.
Camcorder
:
• Video size: Select a resolution for videos. Use higher resolution
for higher quality. Higher resolution videos take up more
memory.
• White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so
images have a true-to-life colour range. The settings are
designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are
similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in
professional cameras.
• Video stabilization: Activate or deactivate Optical Image
Stabilization.
• Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level by
moving the slider.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition
when selecting subjects.
Editing a Photo
You can edit your photos using the built-in Photo editor
application on your device. The photo editor application
provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on
your phone. Along with basic image tuning like brightness,
contrast, and color it also provides a wide variety of effects
used for editing the picture.
• Flash: activate or deactivate the flash.
• Voice control: activates/deactivates voice control feature that
allows you to verbally take a photo.
• Contextual filename: allows you to have your location added
as part of the filename. You must first activate GPS tag
described above.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Gallery
.
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
• Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you to take
and save a mirror-image video when using self-recording
mode.
3. With the image displayed, press
➔
Edit to launch
the Photo editor.
• Storage: Select the memory location for storage.
• Shutter sound: Turn the shutter sound on or off.
• Reset: Reset the camera settings.
Note: To select the picture area, touch and hold the current
picture.
4. Select an image area by touching and holding the
image and then selecting an available option:
• Selection mode: provides several on-screen selection options
such as: Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size, and
Selection mode.
Viewing your Pictures
After you take a photo, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery. For
• Select all: select the entire area of the current image.
Multimedia
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Clipboard: copies the currently selected area to your device’s
clipboard.
Sticker: allows you to place various pre-created
on-screen stickers atop your current image.
5. Use the following editor controls to edit your picture:
Drawing: allows you to add draw directly on your
current picture by using either a brush/pen or
eraser.
Previous: move to previous photo project.
Frame: places a pre-created border style atop
your current image.
Next: move to next photo project.
6. Press
to access the following options:
Rotate: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4
directions. You can also mirror image a photo.
• Save as: allows you to rename your current image and save it
to your gallery.
Crop: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a
photo.
• Select image: allows you to select a new image for editing.
• Take picture: allows you to activate the camera and take a
new image for editing.
Color:allowsyoutoAutoadjustcolor, Brightness,
Contrast, Saturation, Adjust RGB, Temperature,
Exposure, and Hue of a photo.
• Share via: allows you to share your saved photo via various
applications.
Effects: allows you to add various effects to your
photo.
• Set as: assigns the currently saved image as either a: Contact
photo, Home and lock screens, Home screen, Lock screen, or
wallpaper.
Portrait: allows you to apply various face
correction effects.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Tap the Video key (
) to begin shooting video. The
Using the Camcorder
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send
videos.
red light will blink while recording.
5. You can tap the screen to move the focus to the area
you touch.
6. To capture an image from the video while recording,
Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to
tap
. This feature is not available while the
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.
anti-shake feature is activated.
7. Tap the Pause key (
) to stop the recording and
Shooting Video
save the video file to your Camera folder.
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your
subject with sufficient light by having the light source
behind you.
8. Tap the Stop key (
to stop the recording and save
)
the video file to your Camera folder.
9. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,
then tap
10. Press
to play your video.
to return to the viewer.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Camera
activate the camera mode.
to
Viewing your Videos
2. Using the camera’s main display screen as a
After you take a video, you can access various options from
the Image Viewer. The Image Viewer uses your Gallery and
viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camcorder
at the subject.
3. Before you take a video, use the Volume control
buttons to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up
to x4 (400 percent).
Multimedia
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gallery
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message.
3. The following options are available at the top of the
1. Tap
➔
Gallery
.
screen:
All of the Albums that hold your pictures and videos will
be displayed with folder name and number of files.
• Change player
picture is displayed on if you are using Samsung Link.
: allows you to change the device the
• Share via
applications.
• Delete
: allows you to share the picture via various
2. Tap an Album and thumbnails of the contents will be
displayed.
: allows you to delete the picture.
: activates the camera.
Note: If your device displays that the memory is full when you
access Gallery, delete some of the files by using My Files
or other file management applications and try again. For
• Camera
4. Press
for additional options.
Viewing Videos
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to
display them.
Viewing Pictures
1. From the main gallery, press
➔
Slideshow to see a
slideshow of all of your pictures.
2. Tap a thumbnail to view a single picture.
1. Tap a video to select it.
2. Tap
to play the video.
3. Press
for additional options.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important! Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying
the Lock screen. They must both be active and
unlocked. It is recommended that the target device
be on the Home screen.
Using S Beam to Share Pictures
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam
large files directly to another compatible device that is in
direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD
pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and
videos from your gallery, music files from your Music, and
more.
Place devices back to back
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide
the NFC slider to the right to turn it on
➔
Settings.
.
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide
the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or
video), tap Gallery
.
➔
.
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the
preview window.
Tap thhe souurce image
7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back
to begin (1).
Multimedia
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer.
Note: If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the
source device:
6. When prompted, separate the two devices.
7. The picture(s) is transferred to the other device.
- Pull them apart
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on
the source device (providing the file)
- Place them together again
8. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image
preview to begin the transfer (2).
9. When prompted, separate the two devices. After a few
seconds (depending on file size) the recipient with then
see the transferred file displayed on their screen.
To share multiple pictures via S Beam:
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or
video), tap
➔
Gallery
.
2. Locate the selected folder.
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a checkmark
on it and all desired images.
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back
to begin.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6: Messaging
This section describes how to send and receive different
types of messages. It also includes the features and
functionality associated with messaging.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s multimedia message service.
Types of Messages
Your phone provides the following message types:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Text Messages
Important! When creating a message, adding an image, a
sound file, or a video clip to a text message
changes the message from a text message to a
multimedia message.
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
Email and Gmail Messages
AT&T Messages
Hangouts
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and
indicate when messages are received and their type. For
Google+
ChatON
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to
your service provider’s message service.
Messaging
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating and Sending Messages
Note: For the Group option, if the number of recipients is less
than 10, all members in the group will be added. You will
need to delete any unnecessary members in the list by
selecting the trash can icon and deleting unwanted
entries.
This section describes how to create a send a message using
the Messaging app.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
Compose
➔
.
Note: The main Home screen initially contains the Messaging
icon. If you delete it, or if you want to access
Note: Enter additional recipients by separating each entry with
a semicolon (;) then using the previous procedure.
Messaging from another Home screen, you must tap
Apps
➔
Messaging
.
4. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen
keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer
to “Entering Text” on page 62.
2. Tap on the Enter recipient field to manually enter a
recipient or tap to select a recipient from your
5. Add more recipients by tapping the recipient field.
Contacts. You can also select the recipient based on
Groups, Favorites, or Logs.
6. Review your message and tap Send
.
3. If adding a recipient from your Contacts, tap the
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be
contact to place a checkmark then tap Done
.
automatically saved as a draft.
The contact will be placed in the recipient field.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Options
Options before composing a message
Options while composing a message
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
.
1. While composing a message, press
to reveal
2. Before composing a message, press
to reveal
additional messaging options.
additional messaging options:
• Insert smiley: allows you to add emoticons, such as a happy
face to your message.
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for
a certain word or string of words. Enter a search string in the
• Add text: allows you to copy text from your contacts, calendar,
or from a memo to add to your message. This is a convenient
feature for adding names, phone numbers, events, etc. to your
Messaging Search window and tap
.
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread.
Select the messages to delete and a green checkmark will
appear next to the message. Tap Delete
.
• Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the recipient to your
Contacts list. This option only appears if the recipient is not
already in your Contacts list.
contents.
• Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and
its contents.
• View contact: allows you to see information on the recipient.
This option only appears if the recipient is in your Contacts list.
• Add slide: allows you to add a new page to a message.
• Scheduling allows you to assign the current message for
scheduled delivery at a designated time.
• Scheduled messages: displays the scheduled messages
folder and its contents.
• Spam messages: displays the spam messages folder and its
contents.
• Font size: allows you to set the size of your letters when
messaging.
Messaging
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to tag a number as spam
so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam
folder.
Adding attachments to a message
To add an attachment to your message, tap
one of the following options:
and select
• Remove from spam numbers allows you to unregister a
number from the spam number list. This option only appears if
the number was previously registered as spam.
• Discard: allows you to delete the current message.
• Translate: launches a Translate popup menu. Here you can
both assign the sender’s original language and assign a target
language for the recipient (they will receive your message in the
designated language). Other options include, Check Incoming
messages only, and Include original text in outgoing message.
Tap to create a checkmark.
•
•
Image: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures list
to add it to your message.
Take a picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take
a photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by
tapping Save
Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,
then add it to your message
.
•
•
.
Record video: allows you to temporarily exit the message,
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it
to your message by tapping Save
.
• Font size: allows you to set the size of your letters when
messaging.
•
•
•
Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping Done
Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then
automatically attached to the message.
.
S Memo: allows you to add an S Memo that you have created.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
•
Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar. Select
the desired event and tap Done
Viewing New Received Messages
1. When you receive a new message, the new message
icon will appear at the top of your screen.
.
Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing
your location.
Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,
then add it to your message by tapping Done
.
– or –
Adding Additional Text
From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
tap the new message to view it.
then
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and
events from your Contacts, Calendar or a Memo.
1. While composing a message, press
➔
Add text.
The selected message appears in the display.
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:
3. To play a multimedia message, tap
.
• S Memo: allows you to insert text from an existing S Memo.
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a
calendar event to your message.
•
To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap
.
4. To scroll through the message (if additional text pages
have been added), touch the screen and in a single
motion, scroll up or down the page.
• Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the
location on Google Maps.
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of
any of your contacts to your message.
• Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and
sentences.
The information is added to your message.
Messaging
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Copy: copies the currently selected message bubble from the
thread.
Message Threads
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped
into message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see
all the messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and
displays a contact on the screen. Message threads are listed
in the order in which they were received, with the latest
message displayed at the top.
• Lock/Unlock: locks or unlocks the currently selected message
bubble from being accidentally deleted.
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message
bubble to an external recipient.
• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as
a single text message within the SIM card.
• View message details: displays details for the currently
selected message bubble.
To access message thread options:
�
From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the
message to display the following options:
• View contact: displays the Contact’s Overview page.
• Add to contact: begins the process of adding the new number
to your Contacts list.
• Translate: translates the text from the currently selected
bubble into a desired language.
Deleting Messages
• Delete: deletes the currently selected message thread.
• Add to spam numbers: adds the current sender to a spam list.
ny new texts from this sender are automatically blocked.
Deleting a single message thread
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
.
2. Touch and hold a message, then tap Delete
.
To access additional Bubble options:
3. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to
�
Touch and hold the message bubble within an active
message conversation to display the following options:
• Delete: deletes any currently selected message bubble from
the thread.
cancel.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting multiple message threads
Messaging Settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
.
2. Press
➔
Delete threads.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
➔
3. Tap each message you want to delete. A checkmark
➔
Settings.
will appear beside each message you select.
2. The following Messaging settings are available:
4. Tap Delete
.
General settings:
5. At the Delete prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to
cancel.
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is
reached, rather than having them overwritten.
Message Search
You can search through your messages by using the
Message Search feature.
• Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text
messages can be in one conversation.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
2. Tap Search
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase to
search for, then tap
.
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how
many multimedia messages can be in one conversation.
• Text templates: allows you to edit or add new text templates to
use in your messaging.
➔
.
.
4. All messages that contain the search string you
Text message (SMS) settings:
entered are displayed.
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the
messages that you have stored on your SIM card.
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your
Message center where your messages reside while the system
is attempting to deliver them.
Messaging
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text
messages. Choose between GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or
Automatic.
Display:
• Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles
for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that
surround each message.
Multimedia message (MMS) settings:
• Group messaging: allows you to send a single message to
multiple recipients.
• Background style: allows you to choose from several
background styles for your messages.
• Auto retrieve: allows the message system to retrieve
messages automatically.
• Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by
using the up or down volume keys.
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode, Free,
Restricted, or Warning.
Push message settings:
• Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from
the network.
–
Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the
Core MM Content Domain.
Cell Broadcast (CB) settings:
–
• CB activation: allows you to receive Cell Broadcast (CB)
messages.
• Channel configuration: allows you to set up the channel that
you will receive CB messages on.
–
Free: you may add any content to the message.
• MMS alert: allows you to receive an alert when MMS mode
becomes active.
Notifications settings:
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your
status bar.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your
message notifications.
Signature settings:
• Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create
a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.
• Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your
message.
• Vibrate: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated
with message alerts.
• Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or Every
10 minutes.
Spam message settings:
• Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure
available spam settings such as:
• Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a
preview of new message text on the Status bar.
Emergency message settings:
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to manually enter and
assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source.
• Add to spam phrases: allows you to assign a specific text
phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.
• Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked numbers.
• Emergency alerts: allows you to receive wireless emergency
alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS).
• Emergency notification review: allows you to play the
emergency alert tone so you will know what to expect when an
alert is received.
• Alert reminder: allows you to set reminders after you receive
an alert. You can select Once, Every 2 minutes, Every 15
minutes, or Off (default).
Messaging
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customers may choose not to receive Imminent Threats
(Extreme and Severe) and AMBER Alerts. Alerts issued by the
President can not be disabled. To disable Imminent Threats
and AMBER Alerts, follow the instructions below:
Emergency Alerts
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) which
may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network (PLAN). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
1. From the main Home screen, tap Messaging
2. Press Settings
3. Scroll to the bottom and tap Emergency alerts
.
➔
.
.
4. All alerts are enabled by default (checkmark showing).
Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove
the checkmark.
Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive
geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are
provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and
will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within
their area. There is no charge for receiving an Emergency
Alert message.
Using Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive text message alerts
when you receive an important email.
Creating an Email Account
1. From the Home screen, tap Email
There are three types of Emergency Alerts:
.
•
•
Alerts issued by the President
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life (Extreme and
Severe)
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.
•
AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)
3. Enter your password in the Password field.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
5. If you want all of your emails sent from this email
account by default, tap the checkbox to create a
checkmark. This checkbox only appears if you have
previously set up an email account.
tap Show password to create a checkmark.
5. Tap Next
.
6. At the Account options screen, tap any of the options
6. Tap Manual setup
.
you would like.
7. Tap the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync field.
7. Tap Next
8. Enter a name for this email account (optional).
9. Tap Done
.
8. Enter all the Exchange server information, Domain,
User name and Password, then tap Next
.
.
9. At the Activation prompt, tap OK
.
Creating a Corporate Email Account
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to
The Account options screen is displayed.
synchronize with a corporate email account.
10. Enter the desired information in the different fields,
1. From the Home screen, tap Email
.
then tap Next
11. Enter an Account name for this account (Optional) and
tap Done
Wait for the Inbox to synchronize before use.
12. Press Settings to change the account settings.
.
Your accounts screen displays with an Email setup
screen displayed.
.
2. Enter you email address in the Email address field.
3. Enter your password in the Password field.
4. If you want to see your password as it is being typed,
tap Show password to create a checkmark.
➔
Messaging
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The new Email account is displayed.
Creating Additional Email Accounts
To create additional email accounts after setting up your first
account, follow these steps:
Using Gmail
Gmail is Google’s web-based email. When you first setup the
phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized
with your Gmail account.
1. From the Home screen, tap Email
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
Signing into Your Gmail
2. Press
➔
Settings.
3. Tap Add account to add another email account.
4. Enter the information required to set up another
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to
access Gmail.
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
Switching Between Email Accounts
1. From the Home screen, tap Email
.
2. From the Home screen, tap
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
➔
Gmail
.
Your Email screen displays showing your emails from
the active account.
2. Tap the Inbox button
at the top of your screen.
Your Email accounts screen is displayed.
3. Tap the Email account Inbox you would like to switch
to. You can also select Combined inbox which will
display email messages from all accounts.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press
for additional options.
Creating a Gmail Message
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap
screen to create a new message.
at the bottom of the
Hangouts
Hangouts is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. You can connect with
your friends across computers and various Android devices.
You can have conversations or video calls with up to 10
friends.
2. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.
Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a
comma.
3. Tap
copy.
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind
Note: The first time you use Hangouts, you will need to
download the updated application from the Play Store.
4. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.
5. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your
message.
6. Tap
to send.
1. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
Viewing a Gmail Message
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view it.
2. The following options are available at the bottom of the
screen after a message has been selected:
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Hangouts
.
3. The first time you access Hangouts, tap Confirm to
confirm your mobile number. If the number is not
correct, tap Edit Number to change it.
• Archive
: archives the selected message.
• Delete : deletes the message.
• Mark Unread
: after reading a message, marks as unread.
4. Begin using Hangouts.
• Newer: swipe your screen to the right to see newer messages.
• Older: swipe your screen to the left to see older messages.
Messaging
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press
Hangouts.
➔
Help for more information on using
Messages App
AT&T Messages brings your texts, calls, and voicemail
messages together into a single conversation thread and is
accessible by phone or computer.
Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. The first time you use AT&T Messages, tap Update
AT&T Messages
➔
Messages
.
.
3. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Google+
.
Note: The first time you use the AT&T Messages app, you will
need to download the updated application from the Play
Store. When the Play Store page displays, tap Update
then follow the on-screen instructions. For more
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
Tap Add account to create another account.
4. At the Legal stuff... screen, tap Accept to continue.
5. Tap Call Voicemail to record a personal greeting and set
up your app.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the AT&T
Messages app.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ChatON
Provides a global mobile communication service where you
can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share
things such as pictures, videos, animation messages
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location
information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
ChatON
.
2. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not
already done so. For more information, refer to
3. Read the introduction and tap Next
.
Note: The first time you use the ChatON app, you will need to
download the updated application from the Play Store.
When the Play Store page displays, tap Update then
follow the on-screen instructions. For more information,
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to register and use
the ChatON app.
For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com
.
Messaging
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7: Changing Your Settings
This section explains the settings used for customizing your
device.
My device
:
My device
This tab provides access to device configuration
and customization features. Features include:
Lock screen, Display, LED indicator, Sound, Home
screen mode, Call, Blocking mode, Hands-free
mode, Power saving mode, Accessory,
Accessing Settings
1. From any Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
.
– or –
From any Home screen, press
➔
Settings.
Accessibility, Language and input, Motions and
gestures, Smart screen, Air view, and Voice control.
Settings Tabs
The Settings are divided into 4 main groups. When the
Accounts
:
Settings screen displays, the following 4 tabs are located at
the top of the screen:
This tab provides both the ability to create and
modifyyour accounts(example; Samsungaccount,
Email,Google account,etc.)andaccessBackupand
reset features.
Connections
:
This tab allows you to see all of settings related to
the connection of your device to external sources.
Features include: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data usage,
More networks (Airplane mode, Default messaging
app, Printing, Mobile networks, Tethering and
portable hotspot, and VPN), NFC,
More
:
This tab provides access to the remaining set of
devicesettingsnotlistedundertheotherthreetabs.
These include Location, Security, Application
manager, Default applications, Battery, Storage,
Date and time, and About device.
S Beam, Nearby devices, and Screen Mirroring.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
Note: The settings for your device are described below in the
order that they appear within the Settings menu. Options
under the Connections tab are listed first, followed by
My device, Accounts, and More settings.
.
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct
button.
Wi-Fi Settings
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For information on
Advanced Wi-Fi Settings
The advanced Wi-Fi settings allow you to set up and manage
Activating Wi-Fi
wireless access points.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections Wi-Fi
2. Press Advanced
The following options are available:
➔
Settings
➔
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
➔
Wi-Fi.
➔
.
➔
.
.
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.
• Passpoint: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi
Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the
Activating Wi-Fi Direct
right to turn it on
.
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
• Sort by: allows you to sort by Alphabet or Signal strength.
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to
disconnect from Wi-Fi.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections Wi-Fi
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
95
• Always allow scanning: allows the Google location service
and other apps to scan for networks, even when Wi-Fi is turned
off.
Activating Bluetooth
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON
The Bluetooth icon is displayed on the status bar.
.
• Auto network switch: allows the device to automatically
switch between a Wi-Fi network or a cellular network.
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.
• Install certificates: allows you to install security certificates
that you have on a MicroSD card.
.
Additional Bluetooth Settings
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections Bluetooth
➔
Settings
➔
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.
➔
.
2. Tap Scan to scan for nearby discoverable devices. After
searching, tap a device to pair with it. For more
Bluetooth settings
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices
with which to pair.
3. Press
and select a Bluetooth setting to configure:
• Visibility timeout: Use this setting to control when to
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5
minutes, 1 hour, or Never time out.
• Received files: Shows the list of files received by using
Bluetooth.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Help: Provides additional information on Bluetooth and
Bluetooth settings.
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider
may account for data usage differently.
4. Tap the checkbox next to SAMSUNG-SGH-I337 if you do
not want your phone visible to other Bluetooth devices.
6. Press
to display additional options. Tap to activate.
Data Usage
• Data roaming: enables data roaming on your device.
• Restrict background data: restricts some apps and services
from working unless you are connected to a Wi-Fi network.
• Auto-sync data: allows your accounts to automatically sync
• Show Wi-Fi usage: displays a Wi-Fi tab that shows Wi-Fi
usage.
From this screen you can view your Mobile data usage and
turn your Mobile data capability On or Off.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections Data usage
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and turn Mobile
data usage on.
• Mobile hotspots: displays available mobile hotspots.
3. Tap Set mobile data limit to create a checkmark and
allow a data limit to be set.
More networks
This option displays additional Connectivity information.
From the Home screen, tap Settings
Connections More networks
4. Touch and drag the orange limit bar to the GB limit that
you desire.
�
➔
➔
➔
.
5. Tap the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and select a
date.
Options display for Airplane mode, Mobile networks,
Tethering and portable hotspots, and VPN.
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of
how much data was used per application.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
97
Airplane mode
Default messaging app
This option allows you to set the default messaging app that
you can use to send all of your messages.
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your phone’s
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are
in an airplane or in any other area where making or receiving
calls or data is prohibited.
�
From the Home screen, tap
Connections More networks
app and make a selection.
Printing
➔
Settings
➔
➔
➔
Default messaging
Important! When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot
send or receive any calls or access online
information or applications.
With the Printing option, you can set your device to print on
compatible Samsung Wi-Fi printers.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections More networks
➔
Settings
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections More networks
2. Tap Samsung Print Service Plugin
3. Tap the ON/OFF slider, to turn Printing ON
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
➔
➔
Printing
.
2. Tap the Airplane mode checkbox to create a
checkmark and activate the feature.
.
.
3. At the Turn on Airplane mode prompt, tap OK
.
Your device will search for compatible printers.
The Airplane mode icon
your screen.
is displayed at the top of
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Press
for additional options.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Access Point Names
Mobile networks
To use Wi-Fi you need access to a wireless access point
(hotspot).
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find
your location or search for places of interest, you must
enable the Mobile networks options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections More networks
2. Tap Access Point Names
➔
Settings
➔
Mobile data
➔
➔
Mobile networks.
To enable data access over the mobile network, this option
must be selected. It is set on by default.
.
A list of the Access Point names display. The active
access point displays a green, filled circle to the right
of the name.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections More networks
➔
Settings
➔
➔
➔
Mobile networks.
2. Tap Mobile data to create a checkmark and activate the
Network Operators
feature.
Using this feature you can view the current network
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.
Data Roaming
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service
provider’s partner networks and access data services when
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections More networks
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections More networks
2. Tap Network operators
➔
Settings
➔
➔
➔
Mobile networks.
➔
Settings
➔
.
➔
➔
Mobile networks.
The current network connection displays at the bottom
of the list.
2. Tap Data roaming to create a checkmark and activate
the feature.
Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching
for an available network.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
99
USB tethering
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer
speed and time.
Note: To enable USB tethering on your phone, dial 611 or go to
att.com/mywireless to set up the service.
Default setup options
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically
search for an available network. You can set this option to
Manual to select a network each time you connect.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
Connections
➔
More networks
➔
Tethering and
portable hotspot
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections More networks
2. Tap Network operators
3. Tap Default setup
➔
Settings
➔
2. Connect your phone to your PC using a USB cable.
➔
➔
Mobile networks.
3. Tap USB tethering to add a checkmark and activate the
.
feature. The USB tethering icon
top of your screen.
is displayed at the
.
4. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network
manually, or tap Automatic to allow the device to
automatically select a network.
Mobile Hotspot
Note: To enable Mobile Hotspot on your phone, dial 611 or go
Tethering & portable hotspot
This option allows you to share your phones’s mobile data
connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Mobile Hotspot
.
– or –
From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
Connections
➔
More networks
➔
Tethering and
portable hotspot
➔
Mobile Hotspot
.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn Mobile Hotspot on by tapping the slider so that it
The connected device can now use internet through
your Portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
changes to the ON position
The Mobile Hotspot icon
your screen.
.
is displayed at the top of
Note: Activating Wi-Fi and connecting to your phone will be
different depending on the type of the other device.
3. Tap Configure at the bottom of the screen.
4. Enter or edit the Network SSID, Hide my device,
Security setting, and Password.
Help
�
From the Tethering and portable hotspot menu, tap Help
5. Tap Show password and Show advanced options to see
them displayed.
for additional information
VPN settings
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).
6. Tap Save
.
7. Press
for the following option:
• Timeout settings: allows you to set the time your device will be
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and
available as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot.
configure one.
Connecting to Portable Wi-Fi hotspot from other
devices
1. Activate Wi-Fi on the device that wants to connect to
Adding a Basic VPN
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-
shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).
your phone.
2. Find GALAXY_S4_XXXX in the Wi-Fi network list and
connect to it. XXXX are four randomly generated digits
that will appear when you set up a Portable Wi-Fi
hotspot on your device.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
101
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock
8. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display
additional VPN options.
9. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Connections More networks
3. Tap Basic VPN
4. Tap (Add VPN network)
➔
Settings
.
➔
Adding an IPsec VPN
1. Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock
➔
➔
VPN
.
.
5. Enter a name for the VPN network in the Name field.
6. Select a VPN type from the Type drop-down menu. The
options are:
2. From the Home screen, tap
Connections More networks
3. Tap Advanced IPsec VPN
4. Tap Add VPN connection
➔
Settings
.
➔
➔
➔
VPN
.
•
•
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
L2TP/IPSec PSK (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol / Internet Protocol
Security Pre-Shared Key)
.
5. Enter a password, confirm the password, and tap OK
6. Enter a name for the VPN connection in the VPN
connection name field.
.
•
•
•
•
L2TP/IPSec RSA
IPSec Xauth PSK
7. Select a IPsec type from the drop-down menu.
8. Enter any other required information.
9. Tap the Show advanced options check box to display
additional VPN options.
IPSec Xauth RSA
IPSec Hybrid RSA
7. Enter the Server address and any other required fields
that are dependent upon the Type you entered
previously.
10. Tap Save to save your VPN settings.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NFC
S Beam
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as Android Beam and S Beam.
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music
files from your Music app, and more.
To activate NFC, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections S Beam
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn S Beam on
➔
Settings
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections NFC
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the NFC
field, to turn NFC ON
Android Beam
When Android Beam is activated, you can beam app content
to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close
together. You can beam browser pages, YouTube videos,
contacts, and more.
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
➔
.
.
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-
.
capable device and the content is transferred.
Nearby devices
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby
devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
Connections NFC Android Beam.
➔
➔
2. From the Home screen, tap
Connections Nearby devices
➔
Settings
➔
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Android Beam ON
.
➔
.
3. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Nearby devices on
3. Touch the back of your device with another NFC-
capable device and the content is transferred.
.
4. Verify
(Nearby devices) appears at the top of the
screen.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
103
5. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK
6. Tap Shared contents, then check the media you would
like to share. Tap OK
.
Note: This feature requires the optional AllShare Cast dongle
which is available as an accessory. See your AT&T
Customer Service Representative for more information.
.
7. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected
devices you would like to allow.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections Screen Mirroring
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
8. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected
devices you would like to not allow.
2. Connect the AllShare Cast dongle to the HDMI device
using an HDMI A-to-A cable.
9. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from Device or
SD card.
3. Press
Mirroring.
➔
Help for information on using Screen
10. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions
you’ll take when you upload content from other
devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always
ask, or Always reject.
Lock Screen Settings
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more
information about using the lock and unlock features, see
Screen Mirroring
The Screen Mirroring feature allows you to share the media
files on your device screen with an HDMI device such as an
HDMI TV.
Screen Lock
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
My device
➔
Lock screen.
2. Tap Screen lock for these options then follow the on-
screen instructions to set up your Screen lock:
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.
• Face unlock: Look at your phone to unlock it.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Face and voice: Look at your phone and speak to unlock.
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or
change your screen unlock pattern.
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
• Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock
screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will
never lock.
• Unlock effect sets the effect you receive when unlocking the
phone. You can select None, Ripple effect, or Light effect.
• Help text shows help information on the Lock screen.
• Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to
wake-up your phone.
Lock screen options
Activate or deactivates various Unlock screen functions.
• Set wake-up command designates your wake-up
commands. Tap Set wake-up command and follow the on-
screen prompts to create a new verbal command.
Note: The Lock screen options will differ depending on what
type of Screen Lock you have selected in step 2.
Face unlock options
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Lock screen
➔
Settings
➔
My device
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
➔
.
2. The following options are available depending on the
• Improve facial recognition allows you to improve your
device’s face matching capability by capturing your face in
different lighting, with or without glasses, and bearded or
clean-shaven. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Screen Lock type that you have selected:
Swipe options
• Multiple widgets allows you to display multiple widgets on
your lock screen. Appears as an options after a lock mode is
enabled.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
105
• Presence check requires that you blink when using the Face
unlock feature. This will increase the security of the feature.
• Secured lock time allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.
• Notification panel: allows you to set the brightness of your
notification panel and also select the quick setting buttons that
you want to display at the top of the notification panel. For more
• Multi window: tap this option to enable/disable the automatic
Multi window feature.
Pattern options
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
• Make pattern visible allows you to see the pattern as you
draw it.
• Screen mode: allows you to select from several different color
modes.
• Secured lock time allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.
• Reading mode: allows you to activate an optimized reading
mode for selected applications. This menu allows you to assign
available applications (such as Calculator, Camera, Contacts,
etc...) for enhancement using the Reader mode. Tap the OFF /
PIN and Password options
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are
displayed on your home screens.
ON icon next to Reading mode to turn it on
.
• Secured lock time allows you to set a time-out for lock screen.
• Brightness: configures the LCD Brightness levels. Tap
Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust or drag
the slider and tap OK.
Display Settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display.
�
From the Home screen, tap
My device Display
The following options display:
➔
Settings
➔
My device
• Auto-rotate screen: allows you to switch the display
orientation automatically when you rotate the phone.
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30
seconds, 1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, and 10 minutes.
➔
.
• Wallpaper: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home
screen, Lock screen, or both. For more information, refer to
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Daydream: allows you to control what your screen does when
your device is docked or sleeping. Tap the OFF / ON icon next
LED indicator
This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging,
missed events, and incoming notifications. The light will turn
on by default unless you turn them off.
to Daydream to turn it on
instructions.
. Follow the on-screen
• Font style: allows you to set the font style that your phone will
use. You can also tap Get fonts online to choose from a wider
selection.
�
From the Home screen, tap
My device LED indicator
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
.
3. Tap the following LED indicator options to create a
checkmark and turn them on or off:
• Font size: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.
• Touch key light duration: allows you to adjust the delay before
the Touch key light automatically turns off.
• Charging: LED lights up when the device is connected to the
charger.
• Show battery percentage: allows you to see the battery
charge percentage next to the battery charge icon at the top of
the display.
• Low battery: LED lights up when the battery level is low.
• Notifications: LED lights up when you have missed calls,
messages, or application events.
• Edit after screen capture: allows you to go edit a screen
immediately after taking a screen capture.
• Voice recording: LED lights up when you are recording voice.
The LED only lights up when the screen is off.
• Auto adjust screen tone: allows you to save power because
the phone analyzes the displayed screen image and adjusts the
LCD brightness.
• Increase touch sensitivity: allows you to adjust the touch
sensitivity of your phone automatically depending on the type of
material on the display.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
107
Ringtones
This option allows you to set the ringtone.
Sound Settings
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Sound
2. Tap Ringtones
➔
Settings
➔
My device
�
From the Home screen, tap
My device Sound
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
.
➔
.
.
The following options display:
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK
.
Volume
– or –
The Volume option allows you to change the volume for all
Tap Add to select a file from your music files.
Vibrations
This option allows you to set your phone to vibrate and ring.
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings
My device Sound
2. Tap Vibrations
phone sounds in one easy location.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Sound Volume.
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
➔
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the sound volume
➔
➔
My device
for Media, Ringtone, Notifications, and System.
➔
.
3. Tap OK
.
.
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK
.
Vibration intensity
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the
– or –
vibration is for different options.
Tap Create and follow the on-screen instructions to
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Sound Vibration intensity
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration
➔
Settings
➔
create your own vibration.
My device
➔
➔
.
intensity for Incoming call, Notification, and Haptic
feedback.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the feature:
Default notification sound
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for
• Dialing keypad tone: makes a sound when you tap a key on
the keyboard.
notifications and alarms.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Sound
2. Tap Default notification sound
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
.
• Touch sounds: makes a sound when you touch the screen.
• Screen lock sound: makes a sound when your screen is
locked or unlocked.
.
3. Tap a ringtone and tap OK
.
• Haptic feedback: makes a vibration when you tap soft keys
and on certain UI interactions.
Vibrate when ringing
This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate
Samsung Keyboard Settings
The Samsung keyboard settings are used when you use the
dialing pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap
the screen.
whenever it rings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Sound
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
.
2. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark and
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Sound
➔
Settings
➔
My device
enable the feature.
➔
.
System Tone Settings
The System tone settings are used when you use the dialing
pad, make a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the
screen.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the feature:
• Key-tap sound: makes a sound when you tap a key on the
Samsung keyboard.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Sound
➔
Settings
➔
My device
• Key-tap vibration: makes a vibration when you tap a key on
the Samsung keyboard.
➔
.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
109
2. Tap the pull-down dropbox and select one of the
following options:
Audio Output
This sound feature configures the audio output.
• Standard mode: provides conventional layout for the apps and
widgets on your home screens.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
.
➔
My device
My device Sound Audio output
➔
➔
• Easy mode: provides easier user experience for first-time
smartphone users on the home screens.
2. Choose from either Stereo or Surround.
Adapt sound
The Adapt sound feature allows you to customize your call
sounds.
3. Tap Apply
.
Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Sound Adapt sound
2. Read the instructions and tap Start
➔
Settings
.
➔
My device
➔
➔
�
From the Home screen, tap
➔
➔
➔
Settings
➔
My device
.
My device
➔
Call.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your
– or –
personal call sound.
�
From the Home screen, tap
settings
➔
Call
.
Home screen mode
Home screen mode allows you to set your display to the
conventional layout of Standard mode or provide an easier
user experience for the first-time smartphone users using
Call rejection
1. From the Home screen, tap
Settings
➔
My device
My device
➔
Call
➔
Call rejection.
Easy mode
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Home screen mode
.
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Auto reject mode on
➔
Settings
➔
My device
.
➔
.
3. Tap Auto reject mode and tap one of the following
options:
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Off: to turn Auto reject mode off.
• The home key answers calls: Tap this option to be able to
accept incoming calls by pressing the Home key.
• All numbers: to reject all calls.
• Voice control: Tap this option to be able to accept incoming
calls by using your voice.
• Auto reject numbers: to reject all calls in your Reject list.
4. Tap Auto reject list
.
• The power key ends calls: This option will allow you to end a
call by pressing the power key without turning off the screen.
5. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list.
6. Tap Unknown, to create a checkmark and automatically
Turn off screen during calls
reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list.
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that
your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.
Set up call rejection messages
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
Set up call rejection messages
to manually add a reject message.
➔
My device
�
From the Home screen, tap
My device Call Turn off screen during calls to
create a checkmark and enable the feature.
➔
Settings
➔
My device
2. Tap
– or –
➔
Call
➔
.
My device
➔
➔
Call alerts
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the
message if desired.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
My device
➔
Call
➔
Call alerts.
2. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and
activate the features:
3. Tap Save to save the reject message.
Answering/ending calls
• Answer vibration: enables your phone to vibrate when the
called party answers the phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
Answering/ending calls
2. The following options are available:
➔
My device
My device
➔
Call
➔
.
• Call-end vibration: enables your phone to vibrate when the
call ends.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
111
• Call connect tone: plays a tone when a call is connected.
• Minute minder: beeps twice every minute that you are on a
call.
• Caller ID: allows you to choose how your Caller ID will be
displayed. Select Network default, Hide number, or Show
number.
• Call forwarding: allows you to forward your calls to another
number.
• Call end tone: plays a tone when a call is ended.
• Alerts on calls: turns on alarm and message notifications
during a call.
• Auto area code: allows you to automatically prepend a specific
area code to all outbound calls.
Call Accessories
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Call Call accessories
2. The following options are available:
• Call waiting: the network service informs you when someone
is trying to reach you during another call. Tap to activate.
• Auto redial: automatically redials the last number if the call
was either cut off or was unable to connect. Tap to activate.
• Fixed dialing numbers: allows you to restrict outgoing calls to
a limited set of phone numbers.
➔
Settings
.
➔
My device
➔
➔
• Automatic answering: configures the device to automatically
answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.
• Automatic answering timer: configures the time delay before
the device automatically accepts the incoming call.
• Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when
the device is locked.
Using Fixed Dialing Numbers
Enabling FDN
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Call Additional settings
numbers
2. Tap Turn on FDN
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
➔
➔
Fixed dialing
Additional settings
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Call Additional settings.
.
➔
Settings
➔
My device
.
➔
➔
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK
.
2. Tap one of the following options:
FDN is enabled.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To enable FDN after it has been disabled, tap Turn off
FDN, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK
Note: Before you can manage an FDN list a list must be
.
created.
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card
does not, this menu does not display.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Call Additional settings
numbers
2. Tap FDN list
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
➔
➔
Fixed dialing
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.
.
.
3. A list of all existing FDN numbers will be displayed.
Changing the PIN2 Code
Ringtones and keypad tones
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Call Additional settings
numbers
2. Tap Change PIN2
➔
Settings
➔
My device
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
Ringtones and keypad tones
2. Tap Ringtones, select a ringtone, and tap OK
3. Tap Vibrations, select a vibration type, and tap OK
➔
My device
➔
➔
➔
Fixed dialing
My device
➔
Call
➔
.
.
.
.
.
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.
4. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a checkmark if you
want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.
5. Tap Dialing keypad tone to create a checkmark if you
want tones to play when the keypad is pressed.
Managing the FDN List
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
113
Personalize call sound
This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear
during a call with and without earphones.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Increase volume in pocket
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is
in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its
location.
➔
Settings
➔
My device
My device Call Personalize call sound.
➔
➔
�
From the Home screen, tap
My device Call Increase volume in pocket to
create a checkmark and enable the feature.
➔
Settings
➔
My device
2. At the Personalize call sound display, tap one of the
following options:
➔
➔
• Adapt sound: allows you to customize your sounds. Follow the
on-screen instructions to set up your personal call sound.
• Soft sound: plays a softer sound when the other party is in a
noisy environment.
Voicemail service
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
My device
➔
Call
➔
Voicemail Service.
Voicemail service provided by your carrier is the
default.
• Clear sound: plays a clearer sound when the other party
sounds unclear or muffled.
2. Tap My carrier to remove the carrier Voicemail service.
• Off: turns off your customized call sound and plays the default
sounds.
Voicemail settings
You can view or modify your voicemail number from this
menu.
Noise reduction
This option helps to suppress background noise from your
side during a call.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
My device Call Voicemail settings.
➔
➔
�
From the Home screen, tap
My device Call Noise reduction to create a
checkmark and enable the feature.
➔
Settings
➔
My device
2. Tap the Voice mail number field, backspace to erase the
➔
➔
digits, and enter a new voicemail number using the
keypad, then tap OK
.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap OK
Sound
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Call Sound
2. Tap a ringtone to hear it played.
3. Select a ringtone and tap OK
Vibrate
This option allows you select vibration settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings
My device Call
.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable
that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was
not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.
➔
Settings ➔
My device
➔
➔
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Call TTY mode
2. Tap TTY Full TTY HCO, or TTY VCO. A green checkmark
will appear. Tap TTY Off to turn it off.
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
➔
.
.
,
Blocking Mode
When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected
features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of
incoming calls from people on your allowed list.
➔
➔
My device
➔
.
2. Tap Vibrate to create a checkmark and activate the
Vibrate feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Blocking mode
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode
slider to the right to turn it on
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
.
TTY Mode
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities,
to communicate by telephone.
.
Confirm that the Blocking mode active icon
appears in the Status bar.
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please
check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure
that it is compatible with digital cell phones.
Changing Your Settings
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Place a green checkmark adjacent to those features
you would like to enable. Choose from: Disable
incoming calls, Disable notifications, Disable alarm and
timer, Disable LED indicator.
All incoming calls and notifications will be read out
automatically.
3. The following options are available:
• Incoming call: read out callers’ information when receiving
incoming calls.
4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active.
Remove the checkmark from the Always field to
configure the From and To time fields.
• ChatON: read out callers’ information when receiving incoming
ChatON messages.
• Air call-accept: wave your hand over the screen to accept
incoming calls.
5. Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are
exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All
contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will
• Message: read out senders’ information when receiving
incoming calls.
then appear in the Allowed contact list
.
• Alarm: read out alarm information when alarms sound.
• Schedule: read out scheduled alarm information when alarms
sound.
Hands-free Mode
When Hands-free mode is enabled, incoming calls and
notifications will be read out automatically.
4. You can disable Hands-free mode by saying “Hands•
free mode off” while in S voice, or by accessing the
Settings menu and sliding the Hands-free mode slider
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Hands-free mode
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Hands-free mode to the
right to turn it on
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
.
to the off position
panel.
or by using the Notification
.
Confirm that the Hands-free mode active icon
appears in the Status bar.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power saving mode
Power saving mode allows you to manage your phone to
conserve power.
Accessory Settings
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when
using a car or desk dock.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Power saving mode
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon next to Power saving mode to turn
Power saving mode on
➔
Settings
➔
My device
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Accessory
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
.
➔
.
2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or
removing the phone from the dock.
.
3. Tap the following options to create a checkmark and
conserve power:
3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock
speakers when the phone is docked.
• CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum
performance of the CPU.
4. Tap Desk home screen display to display the desk home
screen whenever the phone is docked.
5. Tap Automatic unlock if you are using a phone cover
and you want your phone to unlock when you open the
cover.
• Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power
level.
• Turn off haptic feedback: allows you to turn off vibration when
you tap or touch the screen.
6. Tap Show in-call screen to automatically turn on your
screen when you move your device away from your ear
during a call.
4. Tap Learn about power saving to learn about various
ways to conserve battery power.
7. Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or
Surround.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
117
• Answering/ending calls: accept incoming calls by pressing
the home key or end calls using the power key.
• Easy touch mode: allows you to easily tap the screen to stop
snooze alarms, calendar events and timers, and accept/reject
incoming calls.
Accessibility
Accessibility services are special features to make using the
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.
Note: You can download accessibility applications from Play
• Show shortcut: allow the accessibility shortcut under the
device options to be used by pressing and holding the power
key.
Store and manage their use here.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Accessibility
2. The following options are available:
➔
Settings
➔
My device
• Manage accessibility: save and update your accessibility
settings or share them with another device. You can export your
settings, import a previously saved file, or share your file with
another device.
➔
.
• Auto rotate screen: automatically rotate the screen from
landscape to portrait when you rotate your phone.
• Screen timeout: timeout the accessibility feature after a
defined amount of time.
• TalkBack: activate the TalkBack feature.
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback
• Secured lock time: allows you to set the time of inactivity that
passes before your screen locks. This option only appears if
you have set your screen lock feature to any option other than
None or Swipe. For more information, refer to “Screen Lock”
on page 104.
to help blind and low-vision users.
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,
except passwords, including personal data and
credit card numbers. It may also log your user
interface interactions with the device.
• Speak passwords: reads out password information.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Font size: change the size of the fonts used on the device
within menus, options, etc. Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal,
Large, or Huge.
• Text-to-speech options: allows you to adjust your text-to-
• Magnification gestures: use exaggerated gestures such as
triple-tapping, double pinching, and dragging two fingers
across the screen.
• Sound balance: allows you to use the slider to set the Left
and Right balance when using a stereo device.
• Mono audio: allows you to enable stereo audio to be
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use with a
single earbud/earphone.
• Negative colors: reverse the display of on-screen colors from
White text on a Black background to Black text on a White
background.
• Turn off all sounds: allows you to mute every sound made by
the device during taps, selections, notifications, etc.
• Hearing aids: allows you to improve the sound quality of your
device for use with hearing aids.
• Color adjustment: allows you to adjust the display colors if
you are color blind and have difficulty reading the display
because of the colors. Touch and slide the slider to the right to
turn it on
. Follow the on-screen instructions.
• Flash notification: allows you to set your camera light to blink
whenever you receive a notification.
• Notification reminder: plays a beep when you have unread
notifications. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
• Google subtitles (CC): allows you to turn on subtitles when
using applicable Google apps.
• Accessibility shortcut: allows you to quickly enable
accessibility features in 2 quick steps. Touch and slide the
• Samsung subtitles (CC): allows you to turn on subtitles
when using applicable Samsung apps.
slider to the right to turn it on
instructions.
. Follow the on-screen
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
119
• Assistant menu: allows you to improve the device
accessibility for users with reduced dexterity. Touch and slide
Keyboards and Input Methods
You can change the keyboard used by your device by
the slider to the right to turn it on
screen instructions.
. Follow the on-
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
• Press and hold delay: allows you to select a time interval for
this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, Long, or Custom.
• Interaction control: allows you to enable or disable motions
and screen timeout. You can also block areas of the screen
from touch interaction. Touch and slide the slider to the right to
My device Language and input
➔
.
2. Tap Default and select a keyboard.
Select Samsung keyboard or Swype.
3. Tap Set up input methods
4. Tap the icon next to the input method that you
would like to configure the settings for.
.
turn it on
. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Language and input
This menu allows you to configure the language in which to
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard
options.
5. Based on your selection of input method, the
appropriate settings will appear and are explained
below.
Samsung Keyboard settings
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.
Language
You can change the language used by your device by
following these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
My device
➔
Language and input
.
➔
Settings
Language.
➔
My device
2. Tap the
icon next to Samsung keyboard.
My device Language and input
➔
➔
3. Set any of the following options:
2. Tap a language from the list.
• Input languages settings are used to setup the language you
will be using for input.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
–
–
English(US) is the default language. Whatever language you
select in the Select input languages option below, will be
displayed here.
–
Auto punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence
by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen
QWERTY keyboard.
Select input languages sets the input language. Tap a
language from the available list. The keyboard is updated to the
selected language.
• Keyboard swipe: allows you to combine the Samsung
keyboard with an additional input method choose from:
–
–
None leaves text input as only via the on-screen keyboard.
SwiftKey Flow like using Swipe, allows you to enter text by
sliding your fingers across the on-screen keyboard. This feature
is optimized for use with the on-screen QWERTY keyboard.
Cursor control when enabled, allows you to control your
on-screen cursor by moving your finger across the keyboard.
• Smart typing settings provide access to additional typing
settings.
–
Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must
be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and
hold to access the advanced settings. Touch and slide the
–
slider to the right to turn it on
.
• Key-tap feedback provides feedback functions to be enabled
–
Auto replacement automatically completes or replaces the
current word with the most probable word match after
tapping the space bar or entering a punctuation mark. Touch
such as:
–
–
–
Sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
and slide the slider to the right to turn it on
.
Vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an
on-screen key.
–
–
Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of
the first word in each sentence (standard English style).
Auto spacing automatically inserts space between words.
Character preview provides an automatic preview of the
current character selection within the text string. This is helpful
when multiple characters are available within one key.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
121
• More settings provides access to additional access to more
settings.
• Learn from Gmail: allows you to login to your Gmail account so
your phone can learn your Gmail style.
–
Help launches a brief on-screen help tutorial covering the main
concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.
Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their
original configuration.
• Learn from Twitter: allows you to login to your Twitter account
so your phone can learn your Twitter style.
• Learn from Messages: allows your device to learn from your
Messages.
–
• Learn from Contacts: allows your device to learn from your
Contacts.
Predictive Text Settings
From this menu you can set Predictive Text settings.
• Clear remote data: deletes anonymous data that is stored on
the personalization server.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
My device
➔
Language and input
.
• Clear personal data: removes all personalized data that you
have entered.
2. Tap the
icon next to Samsung keyboard.
3. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Predictive text field, to turn it ON
4. Tap Predictive text
5. The following options are available:
• Privacy policy: click the link to read the privacy policy. Follow
the on-screen instructions.
.
.
Swype Keypad Settings
• Live word update allows the device to automatically update its
word database with popular new words every day.
To configure Swype settings:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
My device
➔
Language and input
.
• Personalized data: allows you to use personal language that
you have added to make your prediction results better.
• Learn from Facebook: allows you to login to your Facebook
account so your phone can learn your Facebook style.
2. Tap the
icon next to Swype
.
3. Tap Settings on the left side of the screen to alter these
settings:
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you
enter text using the keypad.
• Landscape keyboard: allows you to set the Landscape
keyboard to Full screen, Mini left, Mini right, or split.
• Keyboard height: allows you to set the keyboard height in both
Portrait and Landscape modes.
• Sound on keypress: turns on sounds generated by the Swype
application.
• Pop-up on keypress: displays the character above the key
when typing.
• Word choice list font size: allows you to change the font size
in the word choice list.
• Long-press delay: set the time needed to select alternate
characters.
5. Tap My Words on the left side of the screen to access
the following options:
• Backup & Sync: allows you to backup your Swype dictionary
and sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.
• Living Language: when enabled, this feature automatically
updates your Swype dictionary with popular new words.
• Social integration: allows you to learn information from your
Facebook, Twitter, and Gmail accounts to help you while using
Swype.
• Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to
display the complete Swype path.
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of
every sentence.
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start
the next word.
• Edit my dictionary: allows you to edit your personal Swype
dictionary.
• Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in
your text string based on your current text entries.
• Show Voice key: once enabled, displays the Voice icon on
your Swype keyboard so you can use the Voice input option.
4. Tap Themes on the left side of the screen to access the
following options:
• Clear language data: deletes all of your personal language
data, including your words.
• Contribute usage data: when enabled, allows the Nuance®
application to collect usage data for better word predictions.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
123
• Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by
the Swype application so it can receive program updates,
language downloads, and other related features via your
existing data connection.
9. Tap Updates on the left side of the screen to download
any new Swype updates. If an update is available, it
will display under the updates heading. If no updates
are displayed, then check back later to see any
available updates.
6. Tap Languages on the left side of the screen to activate
and select the current text input language. Default
language is English. Touch Download languages, to
download additional languages.
Google voice typing settings
From this menu you can set Samsung keyboard options.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
7. Tap Gestures on the left side of the screen to view
helpful information on using gestures while using
Swype.
My device
➔
Language and input
.
2. Tap the
icon next to Google voice typing.
3. The following options are available:
8. Tap Help on the left side of the screen to see the
following options:
• Choose input languages: tap on a language that you want to
input. Select Automatic to use the local language or select a
language from the list.
• How to Swype: provides tips on how to learn to use Swype.
• Show helpful tips: once enabled, displays helpful tips and
hints as you are using Swype.
• Block offensive words tap to create a checkmark and enable
the blocking of recognized offensive words from the results of
your voice-input Google typing.
:
• Version: displays the software version information.
• Offline speech recognition: Enables voice input while offline.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.
• Settings for Samsung text-to-speech engine allows you to
view Open Source Licenses.
Speech Settings
This menu allows you to set the speech settings for Voice
input.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine: allows you to
view Open Source Licenses.
My device
My device Language and input
➔
.
2. Tap Voice search to configure the following:
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.
• Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech
synthesis.
• Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output
always or only when using hands-free.
5. Scroll down to the General section to access the
following options:
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input
Google searches.
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis
(available if voice data is installed).
• Hotword detection: Enable to being able to launch voice
search by saying the word “Google”.
• Default language status: Displays whether or not the default
language is supported.
• Offline speech recognition: Enables voice input while offline.
• Bluetooth headset: allows you to record audio through a
Bluetooth headset if available.
Pointer speed
This option sets your Pointer speed for your mouse or
trackpad when you are using a keyboard dock accessory.
3. Tap Text-to-speech options and select Samsung text-to•
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
My device
speech engine or Google Text-to-speech Engine
4. Tap next to the preferred TTS engine configure the
following settings:
.
My device Language and input
➔
.
2. Tap Pointer speed then drag the slider to the right to go
faster or to the left to go slower.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
125
3. Tap OK to save your setting.
• Air jump: move your hand up or down above the sensor to
jump to the top or bottom of a page or list. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
Motions and Gestures
The Motions and Gestures settings allow you to set up
various Motion activation services. For more information on
• Air browse: move your hand to the right or left above the
sensor to move to the previous or next item such as pictures or
web pages. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Air move: use one hand to press and hold an icon then move
your other hand to the left or to the right above the sensor to
move the icon to another page. You can also use this feature in
your calendar to move events to another day. Tap the ON/OFF
�
From the Home screen, tap
My device Motions and gestures
Air gesture
➔
Settings
➔
My device
➔
.
Air gesture allows you to control your device by performing
motions above the sensor.
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Air gesture
icon
• Air call-accept: wave your hand above the sensor to accept an
incoming call. Tap the ON/OFF icon to turn it on.
5. Press Help for additional information.
Motion
to turn it on.
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
at the top of your screen
➔
to activate Air gesture.
3. Tap Learn about the sensor and icon to learn more about
the Air gesture sensor and its location.
Motion allows you to control your device by performing
natural movements.
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Motion
4. The following Air gesture features are available:
• Quick glance: when your screen is off, reach towards your
device and it will display information such as time, date, missed
calls, incoming messages, and battery strength. Tap the ON/
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
at the top of your screen
to activate Motion.
OFF icon
to turn it on.
3. The following options are available:
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the
Palm motion
Palm motion allows you to control your device by touching
device to your ear. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
your screen with the palm of your hand.
• Smartalert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and
notified of you have missed any calls or messages. Tap the ON/
1. From the Motions and gestures screen, tap Palm
motion
.
OFF icon
to turn it on.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
at the top of your screen
• Zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content
can be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points
on the display then tilt the tilt the device back and forth to zoom
to activate Palm motion.
3. The following options are available:
• Capture screen: Once enabled, you can capture any
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe
form left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard. Tap
in or out. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Browse an image Once enabled, touch and hold a desired
:
on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right
to pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally. Tap the ON/
the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
OFF icon
to turn it on.
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any on-screen
video or mute any current sound by simply covering the screen
with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the screen,
the device goes back to normal by either continuing to play the
current video or unmuting the current sound. Tap the ON/OFF
• Mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any
playing sounds by turning the device display down on a
surface. Tap the ON/OFF icon
to turn it on.
4. Press Help for additional information.
➔
icon
to turn it on.
4. Press
➔
Help for additional information.
Changing Your Settings
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Smart screen
The Smart screen options allow you to customize your
screen settings to make the screen more responsive and
easier to use.
Air view
With the Air view feature, you can hover your finger over the
screen and Air view features will be displayed. For example,
you can hover your finger over a scheduled item in your
calendar to see more details.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Smart screen
➔
Settings
➔
My device
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Air view
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
My device
➔
.
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark
and activate the features:
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
at the top of your screen
to activate Air view.
• Smart stay: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects
that your face is watching the screen.
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to
create a checkmark and activate the feature.
• Information preview: allows you to see information previews,
extended text, and enlarged images when you hover your
finger over the screen.
• Smart rotation: disables the auto screen rotation by checking
the orientation of your face and the device.
• Smart pause: pauses videos when your device detects that
your head has moved away from the screen.
• Progress preview: allows you to preview a scene or show
elapsed time when you hover your finger over the progress bar
while watching a video.
• Smart scroll: the screen will scroll depending on the phone’s
tilt angle once your eyes have been detected. Tap the ON/OFF
icon
to turn it on.
• Speed dial preview: allows you to see the contacts and their
speed dial numbers when you hover your finger over them in
your contacts list.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Webpage magnifier: allows you to see magnified links on
webpages when you hover your finger over them.
• Camera: allows you to take pictures using the voice
commands Capture Shoot Smile, or Cheese or record
videos with the voice command Record video
• Music: allows you to control your Music app using the voice
commands Next Previous Play Pause Volume up, and
Volume down
,
,
.
• Sound and haptic feedback: allows you to play sound and
feel vibration when you hover your finger over Air view items.
,
,
,
,
Voice control
The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice
commands to control your device.
.
Note: If you set the alert type for calls or alarms to vibration,
1. From the Home screen, tap
My device Voice control
➔
Settings
➔
My device
voice control will not be available.
➔
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon
at the top of your screen
Add Account
to activate Voice control.
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to
create a checkmark and activate the feature.
Adding an Account
1. From a Home screen, tap
• Incoming calls: allows you to answer or reject calls using the
➔ Settings ➔
commands Answer and Reject
• ChatON: allows you to answer or reject calls using the
commands Answer and Reject
• Alarm: allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the
commands Stop and Snooze
.
Accounts
➔
Add account.
2. Tap one of the account types.
.
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your
credentials and set up the account.
.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
129
A green circle will appear next to the account type once
you have created an account. Your email account will
also be displayed in the My accounts section of the
main Accounts menu.
Synchronizing Accounts
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.
1. From a Home screen, tap
Accounts
➔ Settings ➔
.
Removing an Account
2. Tap the account which is located in the My accounts
section.
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its
messages, contacts, and other data from the
device.
3. Tap the account name.
4. Tap Sync all to synchronize your account or only tap the
Sync items that you want to synchronize.
5. Tap Cancel sync to stop the synchronization.
6. Tap Account settings to access your account settings.
7. Tap Storage usage to see your storage usage for
different applications.
1. From a Home screen, tap
Accounts
➔ Settings ➔
.
2. Tap the account which is located in the My accounts
section.
3. Tap the account name.
4. At the bottom of the screen, tap Remove account, then
tap Remove account at the prompt to remove the
account and delete all its messages, contacts, and
other data.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Restore
By setting this option, when you reinstall an application, all of
your backed up settings and data will be restored.
Back up and reset
The Back up and reset settings allow you to back up your
data, back up accounts, automatically restore your phone,
and reset your phone settings to the factory settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Accounts Back up and reset
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
Back Up My Data
By setting this option, the Google server will back up all of
2. Tap Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic
restoration of settings from the Google server.
your settings and data.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Accounts Back up and reset
➔
Settings
➔
Factory Data Reset
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings
➔
.
2. Tap Back up my data to enable or disable back up of
application data, WI-Fi passwords, and other settings
to the Google server.
to the factory default settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Accounts Back up and reset
2. Tap Factory data reset
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
.
Backup Account
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the
Backup account option is available.
The Factory data reset screen displays reset
information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Accounts Back up and reset
➔
Settings
➔
3. Tap Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform
➔
.
the reset.
2. Tap Backup account and tap your Google Gmail account
or tap Add account to set your Google Gmail account to
be backed up to the Google server.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
131
• My places: allows you to add location information for your
Home, Office, and Car.
Warning! Performing a Factory data reset will erase all data
from your phone and internal SD card, including your
Google account, system and application data and
settings, and downloaded applications. It will not
erase current system software, bundled
Security
The Security settings allow you to determine the security
level for your phone.
applications, and external SD card files such as
music and photos.
Encryption
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your phone
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD
card each time it is connected:
Location
The Location settings allow you to set up how the phone will
determine your location and the sensor settings for your
phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
2. You must first set up a screen lock type if you haven’t
already done so. For more information, refer to “Screen
Lock” on page 104.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Location
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
2. The menu is separated into various sections:
• Mode: allows you to choose a location mode. each mode
enables different technologies and affects both the accuracy of
the location and battery usage.
3. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the
displayed help screen.
4. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption
on SD card data that requires a password be entered
each time the microSD card is connected.
• Recent location requests: displays services that have recently
requested your location information.
• Location services: allows you to configure your Google
locations services.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap
OK
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.
.
Encryption may take an hour or more.
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change
Set up/change password
your SIM PIN code.
Use this option to set up your password when one is first
required or change your current password.
4. Tap Change SIM PIN
5. Enter your old SIM PIN code and tap OK
6. Enter your new SIM PIN code and tap OK
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security Set up/change password
2. Enter a new password and tap Confirm
➔
Settings
➔
.
➔
➔
.
.
.
7. Re-type your new SIM PIN code and tap OK
.
3. Enter the new password again and tap Confirm
.
Forgotten SIM PIN password
If you enter the wrong SIM PIN more than 3 times, you will
need to contact your AT&T Customer Service Representative
to get the PUK code for your device.
1. Each time you enter a wrong SIM PIN number the
phone will display how many attempts you have
remaining the next time you try and enter the SIM PIN
number.
Set up SIM card lock
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also
change your SIM PIN number.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock
➔
Settings
➔
2. After the third incorrect attempt, SIM is now disabled,
Enter PUK code to continue. Contact carrier for details
displays and your SIM card is locked.
➔
.
.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
133
3. Enter the new PUK code that you received from your
AT&T Customer Service Representative on the keypad
that is displayed.
Device Administrators
The Device Administration feature allows you to select one or
more administration applications that control your device for
security purposes (for example, if your phone is lost of
stolen). These applications enforce remote or local device
security policies.
4. Enter a new PIN code on the keypad that is displayed
and tap OK
5. Enter the new PIN code again in the Confirm PIN code
field and tap OK
.
Some of the features a device administration application
might control are:
.
•
Setting the number of failed password attempts before the
device is restored to factory settings.
Note: While your SIM PIN is locked, you will still be able to
make Emergency calls if necessary.
•
•
Automatically locking the device.
Make passwords visible
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you
Restoring factory settings on the device.
Note: If a device uses multiple enabled administration
touch them while entering passwords.
applications, the strictest policy is enforced.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
2. Tap Device administrators
➔
Settings
➔
2. Tap Make passwords visible to create a checkmark and
➔
.
enable or disable the display of password characters.
.
3. Select a device administrator and follow the prompts. If
no device administrators are listed, you can download
them from the Play Store.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unknown sources
This feature allows you to download and install non-Market
Change security level
This option allows you to set the security level for your
applications.
phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
2. Tap Unknown sources
➔
Settings
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
More Security Change security level.
➔
➔
.
2. Select High or Normal (default).
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.
Security policy updates
When you activate this feature, your phone will automatically
check for changes to the security policy and download any
updates to improve security and service.
Warning! Enabling this option causes your phone and personal
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications
from unknown sources.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
Verify apps
This feature allows you to either block or warn you before
installing apps that may cause harm to your phone.
2. Tap Security policy updates to create a checkmark and
activate the feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
2. Tap Verify apps
A check mark is displayed to indicate it is active.
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
135
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:
Send security reports
When you activate this feature, your phone will automatically
send security reports to Samsung via Wi-Fi for threat
analysis.
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed
in the ROM of your device.
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.
3. Tap a CA certificate to examine its details.
A scrolling screen displays the details.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
2. Tap Send security reports to create a checkmark and
activate the feature.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and tap Turn
off to disable a System certificate or Remove to remove
a User certificate.
Storage type
This option allows you to select where you will back up your
credentials.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security Storage type
➔
Settings
➔
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Turn
off button changes to Turn on, so you can enable the
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently
➔
➔
.
2. Select the backup storage location for your credentials.
Trusted Credentials
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or
remove it.
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.
5. Tap OK to return to the certificate list.
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check box.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
2. Tap Trusted credentials
.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install from phone storage
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.
Application Manager
You can download and install applications from Play Store or
create applications using the Android SDK and install them
on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage
applications.
Note: You must have installed a memory card containing
encrypted certificates to use this feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
➔
Settings
➔
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or
any other company, end-users operate these devices
at their own risk.
➔
.
2. Tap Install from phone storage, then choose a
certificate and follow the prompts to install.
Clear credentials
Clear stored credentials.
Memory Usage
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running
applications.
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted
1. From a Home screen, tap
More Application manager
2. Tap DOWNLOADED SD CARD RUNNING, or ALL to
➔ Settings ➔
certificates.
➔
.
,
,
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Security
2. Tap Clear credentials to remove all certificates.
➔
Settings
➔
display memory usage for that category of
applications.
➔
.
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
137
Downloaded
SD Card
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your SD card.
1. From a Home screen, tap
More Application manager
➔ Settings ➔
1. From a Home screen, tap
More Application manager.
➔ Settings ➔
➔
.
➔
2. Tap the DOWNLOADED tab to view a list of all the
downloaded applications on your device.
2. Tap the SD CARD tab to view a list of all the downloaded
applications on your device.
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the On SD
Downloaded tabs, press
name
4. To reset your application preferences, press
Reset app preferences
➔
Sort by size or Sort by
card tab, press
4. To reset your application preferences, press
Reset app preferences
➔
Sort by size or Sort by name
.
.
➔
➔
.
.
Note: When you Reset app preferences, you will not lose any
app data.
Note: This will reset the preferences for disabled apps,
disabled app notifications, default applications for
5. Tap an application to view and update information
about the application, including memory usage, default
settings, and permissions.
actions, and background data restrictions for apps. You
will not lose any app data.
5. Tap an application to view and update information
about the application, including memory usage, default
settings, and permissions.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running Services
View and control services running on your device.
Battery
See how much battery power is used for device activities.
1. From a Home screen, tap
More Application manager
➔ Settings ➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
➔
.
More ➔ Battery.
2. Tap the RUNNING tab. All the applications that are
currently running on the device display.
3. Tap Show cached processes to display all the cached
processes that are running. Tap Show services in use to
switch back.
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery
usage displays in percentages per application.
2. Tap one of the listed applications to view how it is
affecting battery use.
4. Tap one of the applications to view application
information.
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery
use.
The following options display:
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.
3. From the upper-right tap
(Refresh) to update the
list.
4. Tap the Show battery percentage check box to have the
battery percentage displayed on your battery charge
icon on your status bar.
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services
may have undesirable consequences on the
application or Android System.
• Report: Report failure and other application information.
Note: Options vary by application.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
139
Storage
Note: The Format SD card option is only available when your
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the
memory card and USB as well as mount or unmount the SD
card.
SD card is mounted.
Date and time
This menu allows you to change the current time and date
displayed.
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap
More Date and time
➔
Settings
➔
�
From the Home screen, tap
➔ Settings ➔
➔
.
More ➔ Storage.The available memory displays under
the Total space and Available space headings for both
Device memory and SD card.
2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network to set
the date and time.
3. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network to set the
time zone.
SD card
Tap Unmount SD card to unmount your SD card so that
�
Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set
you can safely remove it, then tap OK
.
the rest of the options.
– or –
1. Tap Format SD card to format your SD card. This will
delete all data on your SD card including music, videos,
and photos.
4. Tap Set date and tap the up and down arrows to set the
Month
5. Tap Set time and tap the up and down arrows to set the
Hour Minute, and PM AM, then tap Set
6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.
,
Day, and Year then tap Set.
2. Tap Format SD card again.
,
/
.
3. Tap Delete all to continue or press
to cancel.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Optional: Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected
the phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.
• Legal information: This option displays information about
Open source licenses, Google legal information, and License
settings. This information clearly provides copyright and
distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms
of Service, Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and
much more pertinent information as a reference. It also
provides the registration process for DivX VOD. Read the
8. Tap Select date format and tap the date format type.
About Device
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial
information, and other phone information such as the model
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernal version,
and software build number.
information and terms, then press
Settings menu.
to return to the
To access phone information:
• Device name: displays the phone’s model name.
• Model number: displays the phone’s model number.
• Android version: displays the android version loaded on this
handset.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More About device
2. The following information displays:
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
• Software update: allows you to update your phone software, if
available. For more information, refer to “Software Update”
on page 142.
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on
this handset.
• Status: displays the Battery status, Battery level (percentage),
Network, Signal strength, Mobile network type, Service state,
Roaming status, Mobile network state, the phone number for
this device (My phone number), IMEI number, IMEISV number,
IP address, Wi-Fi MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial
number, Up time, and Device status.
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this
handset.
• Build number: displays the software, build number.
• SE for Android status: displays the Security Enhancement
status of your device.
• Secure boot status: displays the status of the Secure boot.
Changing Your Settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
141
• Security software version: displays the version of the latest
security software.
5. When updating software, once the update file is
downloaded, you can delay the update on the start
screen by postponing it for a certain period of time. If
you want to resume the update before the selected
Note: Baseband, kernal and build numbers are usually used
for updates to the handset or support. For additional
information please contact your AT&T service
representative.
time, tap Continue update
.
Software Update
The AT&T Software Update feature enables you to use your
phone to connect to the network and upload any new phone
software directly to your phone. The phone automatically
updates with the latest available software when you access
this option.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
More
➔
About device
➔
Software update
.
2. Tap Check for updates
.
3. At the AT&T Software update prompt, tap OK to
continue.
4. The phone automatically updates the software (if
available), otherwise, when the Current software is up
to date prompt is displayed, tap OK
.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 8: Connections
This section describes the various connections your phone
can make including Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Connecting your
PC.
Turning Wi-Fi On
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off. Turning
Wi-Fi on makes your device able to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs.
Wi-Fi
About Wi-Fi
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections Wi-Fi
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity"and sometimes referred to
as wifi) is a term used for certain types of Wireless Local
Area Networks (WLAN). These device types use an 802.11
wireless specification to transmit and receive wireless data.
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing and
accessible Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can
either be Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or
Secured (requiring knowledge of the Router name and
password).
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
.
Connect to a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
Connections
➔
Wi-Fi.
The network names and security settings (Open
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi
networks are displayed in the Wi-Fi networks section.
2. Tap the network you want to connect to.
Note: When you select an open network, you will be
automatically connected to the network.
3. Enter a wireless password if necessary.
Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
143
Manually add your new network connection
1. From the Home screen, tap Settings
Connections Wi-Fi
2. Tap Add Wi-Fi network
Turning Wi-Fi Off
➔
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi OFF
➔
Wi-Fi.
.
.
3. Enter the Network SSID. This is the name of your
Wireless Access Point.
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth can cause an added drain to your battery and
reduce your use times.
4. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This
must match the current security setting on your target
WAP.
5. If secured, you will also need to enter your WAP’s
password.
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
6. Tap Show advanced options, if you need to add
advanced options such as Proxy settings, IP settings,
or Key management.
Connections
2. Tap Scan
All available Wi-Fi networks are displayed.
➔
Wi-Fi.
.
7. Tap Connect to store the new information and connect
to your target WAP.
Note: The next time your device connects to a previously
accessed or secured wireless network, you are not
prompted to enter the WAP key again, unless you reset
your device back to its factory default settings.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Passpoint: allows you to connect to passpoint-enabled Wi-Fi
Access Points automatically. Touch and slide the slider to the
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons show your Wi-Fi connection status at a
right to turn it on
.
glance:
• Sort by: allows you to sort by alphabet or RSSI.
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: allows you to specify when to
disconnect from Wi-Fi.
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point
(WAP).
Displays when there is a Wi-Fi access point
available but you are not connected to it. May also
display if there is a communication issue with the
target Wireless Access Point (WAP).
• Always allow scanning: allows the Google location service
and other apps to scan for networks, even when Wi-Fi is turned
off.
• Auto network switch: allows the device to automatically
switch between a Wi-Fi network or a cellular network.
• Auto connect: allows you to be automatically connected to an
AT&T Wi-Fi Hotspot as soon as your phone detects it.
• Install certificates: allows you to install security certificates
that you have on a MicroSD card.
Displays when connected to another device using
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
The Advanced Wi-Fi menu allows you to set up many of your
device’s advanced Wi-Fi services.
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections Wi-Fi
2. Press Advanced
The following options are available:
• Network notification: alerts you when a new WAP is available.
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
➔
.
Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
145
8. Once connected, the other device will show as
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the
icon will display at the top of your screen.
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.
9. For additional information about Wi-Fi Direct, press
Note: See your service plan for applicable charges for Wi-Fi
➔
Help.
Direct.
Sharing Information with Connected Device
To share Videos, Photos, or other information with the
connected device, follow these steps:
1. View the information that you want to share. For
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in
your camera viewer or My Files folder, then tap the
Share, Share via, or Send via option.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections Wi-Fi
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the Wi-Fi
field, to turn Wi-Fi ON
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
.
3. At the bottom of the Wi-Fi screen, tap the Wi-Fi Direct
button.
2. Tap the Wi-Fi Direct option.
3. Tap the connected device name. For example,
Android_49ba.
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on the other device you want to
connect with. The steps on a different model of phone,
may be different.
4. Tap Done
.
5. On your phone, tap Scan
.
5. The file is transferred and the other device will receive
The device scans for other Wi-Fi Direct devices.
a screen notification that a Wi-Fi file has been
6. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,
received. The file can be found in My Files
➔
All files
tap on it.
➔
Device storage in the ShareViaWifi folder.
7. The other device has 2 minutes to tap Accept for the
connection to be made.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NFC
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and
NFC (Near Field Communication) allows data exchange when
you touch your device with another compatible device. This
is used for applications such as S Beam. To activate NFC on
shared folder information may differ.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi
connections, and track your data use.
S Beam
When S Beam is activated, you can beam files to another
NFC-capable device by holding the devices close together.
You can beam images and videos from your Gallery, music
files from your Music app, and more. For more information,
1. From the Home screen, tap
Wi-Fi
➔
AT&T Smart
.
2. The first time you access AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you will
need to install it. Tap OK at the prompt.
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
done so.
Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is
usually up to approximately 30 feet.
4. The Play Store displays the AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
application. Tap Update
.
5. Tap Accept
.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Wi-Fi.
.
Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
147
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Bluetooth Settings
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,
including:
➔
Settings
➔
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth ON
.
•
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
.
•
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other
Bluetooth devices
When active,
appears within the Status area.
To turn Bluetooth off:
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Connections
2. Tap the ON/OFF slider, located to the right of the
➔
Settings
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
➔
.
Connections
2. Verify your Bluetooth is ON
3. Tap Bluetooth
.
.
Bluetooth field, to turn Bluetooth OFF
.
.
Bluetooth Status Indicators
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
To change your Bluetooth name:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
More
2. Use the keyboard to modify your device name and tap
OK
➔
About device
➔
Device name.
Displays when Bluetooth is active.
.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating.
To make your device visible:
1. From the Bluetooth settings page, press
➔
Visibility time-out
.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
Making your device visible allows it to be detected by other
devices for pairing and communication.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. Select a time that you would like your device visibility
2. Tap Scan. Your device will display a list of discovered
in-range Bluetooth devices.
to time-out.
3. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
To show received files:
4. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK
5. The external device will then have to also accept the
connection and enter your device’s PIN code.
Once successfully paired to an external device,
appears within the Status area.
.
�
From the Bluetooth settings page, press
Received files
A list of all files received from Bluetooth is displayed.
➔
.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan to search
for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices such
as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations
may be different, and functions such as transfer or
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth
compatible devices.
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the
discovery and authentication process.
Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
149
Deleting a paired device (unpair)
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time
process. Once a pairing has been created, the devices
will continue to recognize their partnership and
exchange information without having to re-enter a
passcode again.
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection
record” and upon reconnection would require that you re•
enter all the previous pairing information.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap
next to the
previously paired device. This opens the connected
device’s menu options.
Disconnecting a paired device
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection
between the device and your phone, but retains the
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the
connection information again.
3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.
4. Tap Rename to change the name of the paired device.
5. Tap Call audio to enable or disable call audio from the
paired device.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
6. Tap Media audio to enable or disable media audio from
the paired device.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously
paired device (from the bottom of the page).
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of
your phone or it is powered off.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. A Bluetooth share notification will appear in your
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or
other items using a Bluetooth connection.
notifications list.
PC Connections
You can connect your device to a PC using your PC data
cable using various USB connection modes.
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be
Storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of
the phone to store and upload files. This option allows your
computer to detect the phone as a removable storage drive.
enabled, and the recipient’s device must be visible.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
Kies: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You
can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download
apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device
firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your
devices.
2. From the Home screen, tap Contacts
3. Press Share namecard via
.
➔
.
4. Tap each contact that you would like to send via
Bluetooth. A green checkmark will appear next to each
entry you select.
Mac).
5. Tap Done
.
6. Tap Bluetooth
.
7. Select the paired device to send the contacts to.
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and
communicating for the pairing to be successful.
Connections
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
151
Note: If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have
Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your
computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0
or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your
computer.
Connecting as a Storage Device
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the
device, you can also access the files directory from the
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.
1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the
cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up
window displays on the PC when connected.
2. On the PC pop-up, click Open device to view files
.
3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 9: Applications
This section contains a description of each application that is
available in the Apps Menu, its function, and how to navigate
through that particular application. If the application is
already described in another section of this user manual,
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.
Amazon Kindle
This application allows you to download books, magazines,
and newspapers to read on your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Amazon Kindle
.
2. At the Kindle display, tap Get Kindle for Android
.
Note: This manual only addresses applications that have been
loaded on your device as of the date of purchase.
Information concerning third party applications that you
may choose to download from the Google Play Store or
otherwise should be obtained from the application
provider directly and not from Samsung.
3. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the
application from the Play Store.
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
153
AT&T FamilyMap
AT&T Locker
AT&T Locker allows you to store, share, and sync all of your
photos, videos, and documents in one safe, convenient
place; the AT&T cloud.
1. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
AT&T FamilyMap provides peace of mind by being able to
conveniently locate a family member from your wireless
phone or PC and know that your family's location information
is secure and private.
Note: FamilyMap requires a paid subscription. To sign up for
information or contact your AT&T Customer Service
Representative.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
AT&T Locker
.
3. At the AT&T Locker home screen, tap Sign Up to create
an account or tap Log In if you already have an
account.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
AT&T FamilyMap
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Locker.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AT&T Mobile Locate
AT&T Navigator
With the AT&T Mobile Locate app you can access the Mobile
Protection Pack and with a paid subscription, replace your
phone if it is lost or damaged, locate your phone if it is lost,
and receive backup and phone support.
AT&T Navigator provides you with access to real-time GPS-
driven applications. These programs not only allow you to
achieve turn-by-turn navigation, but also access local
searches.
Important! In order to take advantage of the AT&T Mobile
Locate application, you must purchase the Mobile
Protection Pack within 30 days of purchase/
Important! You must have a data plan to use this feature.
Note: These services require the purchase of a subscription.
activation of a new device. For more information,
visit att.com/mpp
.
To launch the AT&T Navigator application, follow these steps:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
AT&T Navigator
.
.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
AT&T Mobile Locate
2. Read the Terms of Service and tap I Accept to
acknowledge the terms of use.
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use AT&T Mobile
The first time that you use AT&T Navigator, the
necessary files will be downloaded. The AT&T
Navigator main screen displays.
Locate.
3. Tap an AT&T Navigator plan that you choose to
purchase.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Applications
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the
corresponding on-screen arithmetic function key.
4. Enter the second number.
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi
With AT&T Smart Wi-Fi, you can maximize your battery
performance, maximize your data, simplify access to AT&T
Hot Spots and Wi-Fi networks, automate your Wi-Fi
connections, and track your data use. For more information,
5. To view the result, tap equals (=).
6. To view calculator history, tap
located at the
top of the calculator buttons. A history of your past
Beats Music
calculations is displayed. Tap
the calculator keypad.
again to display
Clear
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Beats Music
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you are not already
7. To clear the calculator history, press
➔
history
.
8. Turn your phone sideways to the landscape position to
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Beats Music.
display the scientific calculator.
Calculator
Calendar
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by
day, week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act
as a reminder, if necessary.
With this feature, you can use the phone as a calculator. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division. The Calculator also
keeps a history of recent calculations.
To access the Calendar:
1. From the Home screen, tap
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Calculator
.
➔
Calendar
.
2. Enter the first number using the on-screen numeric
2. The following tabs are available on the right side of the
keys.
display:
• Year: displays the Year view.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Month: displays the Month view.
• Week: displays the Week view.
• Day: displays the Day view.
Calendar Settings
1. From any Calendar view, press
➔
Settings.
2. Tap View styles and select an option.
•
•
Tap Month view styles and select an option.
Tap Week view and select a type.
• List: displays the List view.
• Task: allows you to search for tasks.
3. Tap First day of week and select either Local default,
Saturday, Sunday or Monday
3. Tap
event.
(Create event) to create a new Calendar
.
4. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check
mark indicates selection.
4. Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a
blue box.
5. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone
from within the Select time zone field.
5. Press
and select one of the following options:
• Go to: displays a specific date.
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,
or an individual event.
6. Tap Show week number to display the week numbers
along the side of the week entries.
• Delete memo: allows you to delete a memo stored in your
Calendar memo list.
7. Tap Weather to have weather symbols displayed on
your calendar. A check mark indicates selection.
8. Tap Set alerts and notifications to adjust the event
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.
• Sync: allows you to synchronize your calendar with one or all of
your accounts. This option only appears when an account has
been opened.
notification method. Choose from: Alert
,
Status bar
notification, and Off
.
9. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar
• Calendars: allows you to view the current Calendar accounts.
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.
event notification.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
157
10. Tap Vibration to set the Event notification tone to
vibrate.
3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap Sign in to
bring your open tabs, bookmarks, and omnibox data
from your computer to your phone, otherwise tap No
11. Tap Quick responses to select quick responses to
emailing guests.
thanks
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google
Camera
Chrome.
Use your 13.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a
JPEG format. Your phone also functions as a Camcorder to take
Clock
The Clock application allows you to access alarms, view the
World Clock, set a stopwatch, use a timer, and set up your
desk clock.
ChatON
Alarm
With the ChatON application, you can interact with friends
and family with text, images, hand-written notes and video
shared instantly. You can chat in groups, while a Web client
will allow the easy sharing of content and conversations
between your phone and PC. For more information, refer to
This feature allows you to set an alarm to ring at a specific
time.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Alarm Create alarm . The following options
display:
• Time: tap
alarm to sound. Tap AM or PM.
➔
Clock
➔
➔
Chrome
(Up) or
(Down) to set the new time for the
The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google
Chrome web browser on your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap
Accept and Continue
➔
Chrome
.
.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Alarm repeat: use this option to set the repeating status for the
alarm by tapping on the days that you want the alarm to sound.
Tap the Repeat weekly checkbox to have the alarm repeat
weekly.
• Smart alarm: tracks body movements and calculates the best
time for sounding the alarm. Place the phone somewhere on
your bed then the phone's movement sensor (also known as
accelerometer) is sensitive enough to work from any part of the
bed. Set the Interval and the Tone. Tap the ON/OFF slider to
activate.
• Alarm type: sets the way in which the alarm sounds when
activated (Melody, Vibration, Vibration and melody, and
Briefing).
• Name: allows you to use a specific name for the alarm. The
name will appear on the display when the alarm activates.
2. Tap Save to store the alarm details.
• Alarm tone: sets the sound file which is played when the alarm
is activated. Select an option or tap Add for additional options.
• Alarm volume: drag the slider to adjust the alarm’s volume.
• Location alarm: when activated, the alarm only sounds when
you are at a specific location. Touch and slide the slider to the
Turning Off an Alarm
�
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and sweep the
icon to the right.
right to turn it on
then follow the on-screen
Setting the Snooze Feature
instructions to enter a location.
�
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,
• Snooze: use this option to set a Duration (3, 5, 10, 15, or 30
Minutes) and Snooze repeat (1, 2, 3, 5, or 10 Times). Tap the
ON/OFF slider to activate.
Z
Z
touch and sweep the
icon to the left. Snooze must
first be set in the alarm settings. For more information,
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
159
Deleting Alarms
To delete an alarm, follow these steps:
5. To set Daylight Savings time, press and hold a city,
then tap DST settings
6. Select Automatic Off, or 1 hour
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Clock
➔
,
.
Alarm
➔
➔
Delete.
7. If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol on
the World Clock listing will appear.
2. Tap the alarm or alarms you wish to delete. A green
checkmark will appear next to each selection. Tap
Select all to delete all alarms.
Deleting a World Clock Entry
1. From the Home screen, tap
World Clock Delete
2. Press and hold the city clocks you wish to delete.
➔
Clock
➔
3. Tap Delete
.
➔
➔
.
World Clock
3. Tap Delete
.
World Clock allows you to view the time of day or night in
other parts of the world. World Clock displays time in
hundreds of different cities, within all 24 time zones around
the world.
Stopwatch
You can use this option to measure intervals of time.
1. From the Home screen, tap Clock
Stopwatch
➔
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Clock
➔
.
World Clock. The clock for your time zone is displayed.
2. Tap Add city to add another city to the World Clock.
3. Scroll through the list of cities to find the city you want
to add, or tap the Search bar and use the keypad to
enter a city to search for.
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch and tap Lap to mark a
unit of time per lap.
3. Tap Stop to stop the stopwatch.
4. Tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to erase all times
recorded.
4. Tap the city you want to add. The clock for that city will
display.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer
Desk clock
You can use this option to set a countdown timer. Use a timer
to count down to an event based on a preset time length
(hours, minutes, and seconds).
You can use the Desk clock when you have a desk dock and
you want your phone to display the time, day, date, location,
and weather conditions when it is docked.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Timer
➔
Clock
➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
Desk clock
The default Desk clock is displayed.
2. Tap to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode.
3. To make changes, tap Settings
➔
Clock
➔
.
.
2. The Minutes field is highlighted and set to 1 minute.
Use the keypad to set the number of minutes you want.
3. Tap the Hours field to set hours if desired. As you tap
different fields, they will become highlighted.
4. Tap the Seconds field to set seconds.
➔
.
4. The following options are displayed while in full-screen
mode:
5. Tap Start to begin the timer and tap Stop to pause the
timer.
• Hide status bar: when this is checked, the status bar is hidden
from view.
6. After stopping, tap Restart to continue or tap Reset to
set the timer back to the original setting.
• Wallpaper: tap to select Desk clock wallpaper from Default,
Gallery, or Same as home screen.
• Calendar: when this is checked, the calendar is displayed. Tap
to uncheck.
• Weather: when this is activated, the location, temperature, and
weather condition is displayed. Touch and slide the slider to the
right to turn it on
.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
161
• Dock: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock
sound, Audio output mode, Desk home screen display,
Automatic unlock, and Audio output.
Drive
With the Google Drive application, everything that you add to
your Drive from work or home is also available on your
device. You can create and edit documents on your device
and the changes are saved everywhere.
Contacts
You can manage your daily contacts by storing their name
and number in your Address Book. Address Book entries can
be sorted by name, entry, or group.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Drive
.
You can also synchronize your phone Address Book with
AT&T Address Book, the network backup service.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google Drive.
4. Press
➔
Help for more information.
DriveMode
Downloads
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current
downloaded files (Internet and Other).
With the AT&T DriveMode application, you can set your
phone to auto reply when you are driving and don’t want to
answer the phone. You can set auto reply to Messages,
Emails, and Phone Calls. You can also allow up to five of your
contacts to contact you while you are in Drive mode.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Downloads
.
All of your downloads are listed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
DriveMode
.
2. Tap an available file and select it for use.
The AT&T DriveMode screen is displayed.
3. Choose an available action such as Share, Delete, Sort
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and Privacy Policy and
by size, or Clear list.
tap I Accept to continue.
3. Read the additional information and tap Continue
.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your AT&T
Gallery
DriveMode options.
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or contact image, and
share as a picture message. For more information, refer to
Email
Email enables you to review and create email using various
email services. You can also receive message alerts when
you receive an important email. For more information, refer
Gmail
Gmail is a web-based email service. Gmail is configured
when you first set up your phone. Depending on your
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically
synchronize with your Gmail account on the web. For more
Flipboard
This application creates a personalized digital magazine out
of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,
personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your
Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,
photos from friends and much more.
Google
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Flipboard
.
The Google Search application is the same on-screen
Internet search engine that is on the Google Search Bar on
your main Home screen. For more information, refer to
2. Swipe the screen up and select some on-screen
categories that you are interested in, then follow the
on-screen instructions to build your flipboard.
– or –
Tap Tap to sign in to log into your previously created
profile.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
163
Google Settings
Group Play
As Google has become more intertwined with other
applications, this menu provides a quick and ready access
point to configure preferences for Google+, Maps & Latitude,
Locations, etc. You can also use the Search function to
initiate a Google Search from this menu.
Group Play allows you to share pictures, music, and
documents in real-time with your friends. You can create a
group from your device or join other groups. You can also
play games with your friends.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. The first time you access Group Play, read the
Disclaimer and tap Agree
The Group Play main screen is displayed.
Creating a group
If you have media you want to share, create a group.
➔
Group Play
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Google
Settings and select an on-screen option.
.
2. Tap one of the Google Settings options.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to modify your Google
Settings.
Google +
1. From the Group Play main screen, if you want to set a
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+. For more information, refer
group password, tap the Set group password checkbox.
2. Tap Create group
.
3. If you selected the Set group password checkbox in
step 1, enter a group password at the Set group
password prompt, and tap OK
.
Mobile AP is enabled.
4. Tap one of the media items listed under the Share and
play content heading.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Tap the items you want to share to create a
checkmark, then tap Done or OK
Hangouts
.
Hangouts is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. You can connect with
your friends across computers and various Android devices.
You can have conversations or video calls with up to 10
6. Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their
devices and they can view your media using you as a
Mobile AP.
7. Press
➔
Info for information on the device that is
hosting the Mobile AP.
Help
8. Press
➔
Help for additional information.
The Help application provides detailed help for using your
phone and the included features and applications.
Joining a group
If you want to see media from your friend’s phone, join a
group.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Help
.
2. Tap one of the following for more information:
• New features: provides help on all of the new features and
applications such as Motion, Camera, Group Play, Story Album,
and S Health.
1. From the Group Play main screen, tap Join group
.
2. Your phone scans for available groups for you to join.
3. Tap a group to join.
You will now be able to see your group’s shared media.
• Basics: provides basic information on using your device.
• Applications: provides information on how to use basic
applications like Contacts, Email, S Memo, Internet, Camera,
etc.
4. Press
➔
Info for information on the device that is
hosting the Mobile AP.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
165
• Settings: provides information on settings for Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,
Ringtone, Power saving mode, NFC, Air gesture, Air view,
Smart screen, Motion, Screen Mirroring, and Portable Wi-Fi
hotspot.
3. Sweep the screen left to right to move laterally across
a web page.
4. To return to a previous page, press
.
5. To move forward to a web page, press
.
• Online help: provides more detailed online help for additional
questions you may have.
Browser Options
�
From any web page, press
to access your browser
• Available accessories: provides information on accessories
for your phone that are available for purchase.
options.
Enter a URL
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.
Internet
The Browser is your access to the mobile web. This section
explains how to navigate the Browser and introduces you to
the basic features.
To enter a URL and go to a particular website, follow these
steps:
1. Tap the URL field at the top of your screen.
Accessing the Mobile Web
To access the Browser:
2. Enter the URL using the on-screen keypad.
�
From the Home screen, tap Internet
.
The website displays.
The AT&T/YAHOO! mobile homepage displays.
Search the Internet
To perform an internet search using keywords, follow these
steps:
Navigating with the Browser
1. To select an item, tap an entry.
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with
your finger in an up or down motion.
1. Tap the Search bar at the top of the browser.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-screen
keypad and tap
Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on your
.
device after you exit the incognito mode.
3. Tap a link to view the website.
To add a new incognito window:
1. From your browser, press
Adding and Deleting Windows
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.
➔
Incognito mode.
2. At the information prompt, tap OK
.
To add a new window, follow these steps:
1. From your browser, press
➔
New window.
3. A new browser window displays.
A new browser window is opened.
To exit from the incognito window:
2
2
1. From your browser window, tap
(Windows).
2. Tap
(Windows) to see thumbnails of all open
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the
incognito window. The incognito icon appears in
windows.
3. Tap a window listing to open up that Internet window.
4. Tap at the top right corner of the web page
thumbnail to delete the window.
the upper-left of the new browser window while you
are in this mode.
3. Tap
window.
next to the incognito listing to delete this
Going Incognito
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites
outside of normal browsing. Pages viewed in this incognito
window won’t appear within your browser history or search
history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on your
device.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
167
Using Bookmarks
Editing Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark
you want to edit.
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites are displayed in
the Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can
also view your Most visited websites and view your History.
2. Tap Edit
.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the Name, Address,
and Location.
1. From the Home webpage, tap
(Bookmarks).
4. Tap Save
.
The Bookmarks page is displayed.
Deleting Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, tap and hold the bookmark
you want to delete.
2. Press
to display the Bookmark options.
Adding Bookmarks
1. From any webpage, tap
➔
.
2. Tap Delete
.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the Name, Address,
3. At the Delete confirmation window, tap OK
.
and Location.
3. Tap Save
.
4. Saved to bookmarks will appear at the bottom of the
page.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lookout Security
Maps
Lookout Security™ provides mobile device-specific security
features that are coupled with a minimal performance hit.
Lookout Mobile Security provides key security options that
are unique to the mobile market. Along with the antivirus and
anti-malware tech, there's a lost and stolen phone locator
service, an application privacy adviser, and a backup service.
Depending on your location, you can view basic, custom, and
satellite maps and local business information, including
locations, contact information, and driving directions. You
can also post public messages about a location and track
your friends.
Important! Before using Google Maps you must have at least
an active data connection. The Maps application
does not cover every country or city.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Lookout Security
.
2. Read the on-screen information, then tap Get started
3. Read the on-screen descriptions and activate those
desired features. Tap Next to progress to the next
screen.
.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
inside a building or between buildings
in a tunnel or underground passage
in poor weather
4. Tap New user or Existing user
.
5. Create a Lookout account by entering an email address
and account password.
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
in a vehicle with tinted windows
6. Re-enter the password and tap Start Lookout
.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
169
Using Maps
Mobile TV
Mobile TV is a subscription service that allows you to watch
your favorite TV shows using your handset.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Maps
.
A map will display with your location in the very center.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the Maps
Note: This feature requires a paid subscription. See your AT&T
application.
Customer Service Representative for more information.
Messages
1. Tap
➔
Mobile TV
.
The AT&T Messages app brings your texts, calls, and
voicemail messages together into a single conversation
thread and is accessible by phone or computer. For more
2. Read the 7 day Trial for Mobile TV screen and tap
Accept & Start Trial to continue or Exit to exit.
3. The Mobile TV main page displays. Follow the on-
screen instructions to watch TV.
Messaging
You can send and receive different types of messages. For
Note: Mobile TV will use a large amount of data and you are
responsible for all data charges. It is strongly
recommended that you upgrade to a large data plan in
addition to this purchase.
Mobile Hotspot
This application allows you to share your phones’s mobile
data connection via USB or as a portable Wi-Fi hotspot. For
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Music
Volume control and SoundAlive.
Music is an application that can play music files. Music
supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+, eAAC+, MP3,
WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching Music allows you to
navigate through your music library, play songs, and create
playlists (music files bigger than 300 KB are displayed).
Volume control showing volume muted.
Plays the entire song list once.
Replays the current list when the list ends.
Repeats the currently playing song.
Shuffles the current list of songs randomly.
Songs play in order and are not shuffled.
Lists the current playlist songs.
Playing Music
1. Tap
➔
Music
.
2. Tap a library category at the top of the screen (Songs,
Playlists, Albums, Artists, Music square, or Folders) to
view the available music files.
Displays the current song in the player window.
Assign the current song as a Favorite.
3. Scroll through the list of songs and tap an entry to
begin playback.
Streams the current music file to another device
via Samsung Link.
4. The following Music controls are available:
Pause the song.
Music Options
To access additional options, follow these steps:
1. While in Music, press
2. The follow options are available before you play music:
Start the song after pausing.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
previous song.
.
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to
go to next song.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
171
Music Settings
Note: The following options may or may not appear depending
on whether or not music is actually playing. Also,
options will be different if the song you are listening to is
in a playlist.
The Music Settings menu allows you to set preferences for
the Music app such as whether you want the music to play in
the background, sound effects, and how the music menu
displays.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press Settings
3. Select one of the following settings:
➔
Music
.
• Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a
selected playlist.
➔
.
• Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth
headset.
• Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories
you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,
Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played,
Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you
want to display in the Music menu.
• Delete: deletes the music file.
• Search: allows you to search your device for a certain song.
• Scan for nearby devices: allows you to scan for nearby
devices that you can connect with.
• SoundAlive: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop,
Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, etc.
• Settings: allows you to change your Music settings. For more
information, refer to “Music Settings” on page 172.
• End: allows you to end the Music app.
• Adapt Sound: allows you to set Adapt Sound on when your are
listening with earphones to alert of incoming calls and
notifications.
• Play speed: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and
2.0X using the slider.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Music auto off: when activated, music will automatically turn
off after a set interval.
Adding Music to a Playlist
To add files to the playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
• Lyrics: when activated, displays lyrics when available.
• Smart volume: automatically adjusts each track’s volume to an
equal level.
➔
Music
.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.
4. Tap Add music)
5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music
• Voice control: allows you to use voice commands to control
the Music app.
(
.
Using Playlists
tracks to this playlist then tap Done
.
Playlists are used to assign songs to a list of preferred media
which can then be grouped into a list for later playback.
These Playlists can be created via either the handset’s Music
options menu or from within a 3rd party music application
(such as Windows Media Player) and then downloaded to the
handset.
Removing Music from a Playlist
To remove music files from a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Music
.
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
4. Press Remove
➔
.
Creating a Playlist
5. Tap the checkbox to the left of each track you want to
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Music
.
remove from this playlist, or tap Select all to remove all
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
the music tracks from this playlist, then tap Remove
.
3. Press
➔
Create playlist.
4. Type a name for this playlist in the field and tap OK
.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
173
Editing a Playlist
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you
can also rename the playlist.
Note: If you do not have an external SD card inserted, this
option will not display. All files shown will be from your
internal storage.
To edit a playlist:
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap Playlists
3. Press
4. Tap a playlist name to edit.
5. Enter a new name for the playlist then tap OK
➔
Music
.
Note: Different folders may appear depending on how your
.
phone is configured.
➔
Edit title.
3. If you have an external SD card inserted, tap SD
memory card to see the contents of your external SD
card (memory card).
.
For information on downloading music for your phone, see
myAT&T
My Files
The myAT&T application allows you to manage your own
AT&T account. You can review and pay your bill, check
minutes and data usage, upgrade to a new device, or change
your rate plan.
My Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in
one convenient location.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
myAT&T
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
files
➔
My Files
➔
All
.
The myAT&T page is displayed.
2. Tap Device storage to see the contents of your internal
2. Read the Terms and Conditions and tap Accept to
continue.
SD card.
3. Enter your User ID and Password using the onscreen
keypad, then tap Login
.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Play Books
With Google Play Books, you can find more than 3 million
free e-books and hundreds of thousands more to buy in the
eBookstore.
Optical Reader
The Optical reader allows you to use your camera to identify
text and extract useful information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Play Books
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Optical Reader
3. Follow the on-screen instructions for using the Play
Books application.
.
2. Aim the camera at an object containing written words.
3. Align the on-screen box atop the target text. Once
detected, the device shows on-screen information
such as link and descriptions.
Play Games
This application takes you directly to the Play Store Games
area where you can download games.
Phone
The Phone application allows you to access the dialer
keypad, call logs, and favorites. For more information, refer
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Play Games
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so.
Photos
3. Select an available on-screen option and follow the
on-screen instructions.
Google Photos allows you to share you photos more easily
using the Google+ application.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Photos
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use G+ Photos.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
175
3. At the Google play screen, tap Add account if you have
not previously used Play Music, and follow the on-
screen instructions to create your account and use Play
Music.
Play Movies & TV
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent thousands of
different movies and television shows. You can watch
instantly, or download your movie or show for offline viewing
at a later time.
Play Newsstand
With Google Play Newsstand, you can subscribe to your
favorite magazines and have them available to read on your
phone at any time or any place.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔Play Movies & TV
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Play Newsstand
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and
viewing movies and TV shows.
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
4. Press
for additional options.
Play Music
3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon
to
With Google Play Music, you can play music that you have
added to your music file as well as any music you copied
from your PC. While offline, you can listen to music you have
copied from your PC.
browse the full catalog.
4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept
5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.
6. Tap a magazine to see more information and
subscribe.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Play Music
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a
POLARIS Office 5
POLARIS® Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office
compatible office suite. This application provides a central
place for managing your documents online or offline. The
application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document
Format) files.
magazine.
Play Store
Play Store provides access to downloadable applications and
games to install on your phone. Play Store also allows you to
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
POLARIS Office 5
.
Before using the Play Store you must have a Google Account.
2. Enter your Email information (if desired) and touch
Register to complete the process.
– or –
1. From the main Home screen, tap Play Store
.
2. Sign in to your Google account.
Touch Skip to ignore this registration.
3. The first time you sign in, the Play Store Terms of
Service will be displayed. Tap Accept to continue or
Decline to exit.
The main POLARIS Office 5 screen displays.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use POLARIS
4. Tap Apps Games, or AT&T to download or purchase
,
Office 5.
games or applications. You can also download updates
to existing applications.
S Health
S Health is a wellness application that allows you to better
manage your health by providing you with relevant
information.
5. Follow on the on-screen instructions.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Read the introduction and tap Start
Applications
➔
S Health
.
.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Read the Use of S Health, Connecting Third Party
Devices and Programs, Information Used, Proprietary
Rights and Licences, and Disclaimer of Warranty.
4. Tap the Agree checkbox.
You should also check with your doctor if you have symptoms
suggestive of heart, lung, or other serious disease, such as:
•
Pain or discomfort in your chest, neck, jaw, or arms during
physical activity;
•
•
Dizziness or loss of consciousness;
5. Tap Next
.
Shortness of breath with mild exertion or at rest, or when lying
down or going to bed;
6. Sign in to your Samsung account if you have not
already done so. For more information, refer to
“Creating a Samsung Account” on page 12.
•
•
•
Ankle swelling, especially at night;
A heart murmur or a rapid or pronounced heartbeat;
Muscle pain when walking upstairs or up a hill that goes away
when you rest.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use S Health.
8. Tap
➔
Help for more detailed information.
Before You Start Exercising
Finally, the American College of Sports Medicine
recommends that you see your doctor before engaging in
vigorous exercise if two or more of the following apply:
This app can be used to monitor your exercise. While
moderate physical activity, such as brisk walking, is safe for
most people, health experts suggest that you talk with your
doctor before you start an exercise program, particularly if
you have any of the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
You are a man older than age 45 or a woman older than age 55;
You have a family history of heart disease before age 55;
You smoke or quit smoking in the past six months;
You have not exercised for three months or more;
You are overweight or obese;
•
•
•
•
Heart disease;
Asthma or lung disease;
Diabetes, or liver or kidney disease;
Arthritis.
You have high blood pressure or high cholesterol;
You have impaired glucose tolerance, also called pre-diabetes.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When in Doubt - Check it Out
Toolbar
If you are unsure of your health status, have several health
problems, or are pregnant, you should speak with your
doctor before starting a new exercise program. Working with
your doctor ahead of time is a good way to plan an exercise
program that is right and safe for you. Consider it the first
step on your path to physical fitness.
Writing area
Add Page
Show/Hide
Additional
Options
S Memo
The S Memo application allows you to create memos using
the keypad, your finger, or both. You can add images, voice
recordings, and text all in one place.
Creating a New Memo
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
S Memo
.
Keyboard
2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to
enter edit mode.
– or –
The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described
in the following table:
Tap
to start a new memo in text mode with the
to start a new memo in
keypad displayed or tap
Changes the view mode.
drawing mode using your finger or a compatible
on-screen writing tool. You can change back and forth
in a memo to add text with the keypad and the pen.
Allows you to add free-format drawing.
Displays the keypad to you can add text.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
179
S Translator
With the S Translator you can easily translate words and
phrases into many different languages.
Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings.
Undo the last action.
1. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not
already done so. For more information, refer to
Redo the last action that was undone.
Makeavoicerecordingtoaddtothememo.Thisoption
is not available in free-format drawing mode.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
S Translator
.
3. At the S Translator screen, tap the top language bar
and enter your language.
Providesaccesstoaquickselectionbar. Choosefrom:
Take picture, Images, Clipboard, Maps, and Clip art.
These elements can be used within the memo.
4. Tap the language bar at the bottom of the screen to
select the language that you would like to translate to.
5. Enter text into the upper box and tap
Add an additional page to the memo.
.
It will be translated into the language of the upper box.
– or –
3. When you are finished creating your memo, tap Save
on the top menu bar.
Enter text into the lower box and tap
.
4. Press
to access additional options.
It will be translated into the language of the lower box.
6. Tap either of the Speak buttons at the bottom of the
screen to translate using either language by using your
voice. The translation will appear automatically in the
appropriate box.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Press
for additional options.
9. At the S Voice screen, tap
or say “Hi Galaxy”
to wake up S voice.
S Voice
10. Speak into the phone and follow the on-screen
With the S Voice application you can use your voice to
perform operations that you would normally have to do by
hand such as dialing a phone number, texting a message,
playing music, etc.
instructions.
11. Press
for additional options.
Samsung Apps
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
S Voice
.
With Samsung Apps, you can download hundred of
applications from a variety of categories.
1. Sign on to your Samsung account if you have not
already done so.
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer then tap Confirm to
continue.
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to
continue.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Samsung Apps
4. Read the information on the About S Voice screen, then
.
tap Next
5. Read the information on the Say what you want screen,
then tap Next
6. Read the information on the Wake up S Voice screen,
then tap Next
7. Read the information on the Edit what you said screen,
then tap Next
8. Read the information on the Help screen, then tap
Finish
.
3. Tap an application that you would like, then tap Free or
Price (depending on whether it is free or not).
.
4. Tap Accept and download
.
The application is downloaded to your device. You can
find the app icon in your app menu.
.
5. Press
➔
Help for additional information.
.
.
Applications
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating a New Samsung Hub Account
Samsung Hub
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an
account. Enter the required information.
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung
account.
Samsung Hub makes it easy to find, sample, and purchase
movies, TV shows, books, games, and music, in one user-
friendly location. With hundreds of titles available,
entertaining your family on-the-go has never been easier.
You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch
from any location. Samsung Hub is your gateway to mobile
entertainment.
2. From the Home screen, tap
3. When prompted to connect via mobile networks, select
either Cancel or Connect
➔
Samsung Hub
.
.
Note: You must have an active Samsung Account to purchase
and rent content via Samsung Hub. Samsung Hub usage
is based on service availability.
4. If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or
verified, tap OK. You must be signed in to your
Samsung account to use the application’s various
features.
Important! You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G/LTE
connection to preview and download a media file.
The internal memory acts as a storage location for
your downloaded rental or purchase.
Tip: In some cases it might be necessary to sign in to your
Samsung account via the application. Press
select Sign in
and then
.
Note: Your Samsung Hub account is managed by the Samsung
account application. This application manages your user
profile information.
Important! The Samsung account manages the access
information (username/password) to several
applications, such as Samsung Link, Chat On, and
Samsung Hub.
5. Press
➔
Help for additional information.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• BOOKS: displays featured Book content available for purchase
from the Book store. This page also allows you to search for
new content, or navigate directly to the Book store page by
clicking the Books link at the top of the page.
Using Samsung Hub
The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all
the available categories on one page such as: Music, Video,
Books, and Games. The overview page also displays recently
added media that you can rent or purchase.
• GAMES: displays featured Game content available from the
Game store. This page also allows you to search for new
content, or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking
the Games link a the top of the page.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Samsung Hub
.
•
The Overview screen (landing page) displays an main access
for all available categories and recently available content for
purchase or rental.
3. To purchase or view featured content in more detail,
tap on any content (Thumbnail or text) to navigate to
the product detail page.
2. Scroll across the screen to select from the following
available pages:
• MUSIC: displays featured Music content available for purchase/
stream from the Music store & Radio. This page also allows you
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Music
store page by clicking on the Music link at the top of the page.
• VIDEO: displays featured film and TV content available for
purchase/rent from the video store. This page also allows you
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Movie &
TV store page by clicking the Video link at the top of the page.
4. Depending on the content, you can either purchase,
rent, or stream the content directly from the product
detail page.
5. Choose a payment method, then follow the on-screen
instructions.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
183
•
•
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks
where there is a weak signal.
Samsung Hub Notices
•
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after
you create an account in Samsung Hub.
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the
Media Content has been buffered.
•
Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed
concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Samsung Hub (or “the
service”) that are also registered to the same account.
You may remove a device from your account no more than once
every 90 days.
•
You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set
out for each piece of content (which may be as short as 24
consecutive hours).
•
•
•
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time.
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media
Content later subject to content re-download availability and
content provider permissions.
•
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).
•
•
•
•
You may need network coverage to access Media Content you
have acquired through the Service.
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity to download Media
Content.
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be
viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time.
Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized
device's SD card. No SD Card included out of box.
•
Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers, you can
download Media Content to your TV using HDMI connections;
otherwise, you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your
mobile device output.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Samsung Link
Samsung Link
.
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung
device with your TV, streams content, and even keeps tabs
on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,
on-screen monitoring. Samsung Link makes staying
connected easy.
2. Tap Sign in to sign into your Samsung Account if you
have not already done so.
3. If prompted, read the on-screen message about
network charges and tap OK to continue and return to
the main Samsung Link screen.
Samsung Link allows users to share their in-device media
content with other external devices using DLNA certified™
(Digital Living Network Alliance) Devices. These external
devices must also be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can
be provided to TVs via a digital multimedia streamer.
4. Tap Get started and follow the on-screen prompts.
5. Scroll across the application screen to view either
MY RECENT CONTENT or DEVICES & STORAGE
.
6. The DEVICES & STORAGE screen contains two separate
streaming media options:
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an
active/registered Samsung account prior to using
• Registered devices: allows you to stream/share selected
multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device
connected to the same Wireless Access Point.
• Registered storage: allows you to receive and playback media
stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by
allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming
content.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
185
• Password lock: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link
by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated
Samsung account password. Move the slider to the on position
to activate the feature.
Configuring Samsung Link Settings
Samsung Link must first be configured prior to its initial use.
You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-Fi, Items
to share, source server address, and external device
acceptance rights.
• My account: displays Samsung account information.
• About this service: displays application information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Samsung Link
.
Setting Up Web Storage
Web storage services allow you to use storage space to store
your files and share them on the “Cloud”.
2. Press
and then tap Settings and configure the
following settings as desired:
• Registered storage: allows you to add a Web storage location.
Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able
to use Samsung Link.
Note: If you are using another Web storage service, log into
that service first before using Samsung Link.
• Save to: allows you to save your media to your internal phone
memory or to an SD card.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Samsung Link
.
• Auto upload: allows you to enable automatic upload of images
from your device to those storage locations specified within the
Web storage list. Move the slider to the on position to activate
the feature.
Note: When adding storage, an N Drive is added.
2. Tap Add storage and choose from: Box, Dropbox, or
SkyDrive.
• Video optimization: allows you to setup the video quality for
streamed video content. Move the slider to the on position to
activate the feature.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to register or log into
your cloud service.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Once the process is successfully completed, the Web
storage icon or name appears in the Web storage area
of the main screen.
Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target
Device
Important! Make sure all communicating devices are
5. From the main screen, select a connected device and
then tap on the media that you would like to share.
connected to the same Wi-Fi.
•
A file with
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely
1. Launch Samsung Link on the target device (such as an
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your
device to access the file currently stored on your services’
servers.
Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc.).
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Samsung Link
.
To de-register Web storage service:
1. From the Samsung Link application, press
and
Note: You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before
you can use this feature.
then tap Settings
➔
Registered storage.
2. Tap
at the top right corner of your screen, then tap
next to the web storage service that you want to
3. Tap your device name from the Registered devices
area.
delete.
3. At the Notification prompt, tap OK
4. Tap an available category tab (Photos, Music, Video,
Document, or Files) and select a file.
.
•
A file with
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your
device to access the file currently stored on your services’
servers.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
187
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to
Story Album
With Story Album, you can create a digital Album of your
story in media. Special moments will be on a timeline, and if
you wish, you can have your album published as a hard copy.
place a green check mark alongside it.
6. Tap
(Stream to connected devices) and select an
available target device to begin streaming.
7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the
on-screen Allow button to continue.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Story Album
.
2. Read the introductory information and tap Next
3. Tap Start to begin your Story Album.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
.
Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share
media with the external source.
5. Press
➔
Help for additional information.
8. Confirm
(
Samsung Link Controller enabled
)
TripAdvisor
With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and have your perfect trip.
With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers, it is
easy to find the best hotels, restaurants, and fun things to do.
appears in the Notification area at the top of the device
to indicate you are using your device as the media
source.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
TripAdvisor
.
Settings
2. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not
already done so.
This widget navigates to the sound and phone settings for
your phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use TripAdvisor.
4. Press
for additional options.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage Manager
This app is a shortcut to your Data usage settings so you can
manage your data.
Press and hold to fast-forward the video.
Tap to go to next video.
Volume control.
�
Tap
➔
Usage Manager
.
PIP (Picture In Picture) view. The video will
be played in a small window so you can use
your phone for other purposes while watching
the video. Double-tap screen to return to
previous size.
Video
The Video application plays video files stored on your phone
or microSD card.
Originalsizeview.Thevideowillbeplayedin
its original size.
1. Tap
➔
Video
.
Full-screen in ratio view. The video is
enlarged as much as possible without
becoming distorted.
All videos that you have on your phone and memory
card will be displayed.
2. Tap the video that you want to play.
Keep aspect ratio view.
The video will begin to play.
Full-screen view. The entire screen is used,
which may cause some minor distortion.
3. The following video controls are available:
Pause the video.
Streams the video to another device via
Samsung Link.
Start the video after being paused.
Press and hold to rewind the video. Tap to
go to previous video.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
189
4. Tap List
to display a list of all your voice
Note: The screen view icons are a three-way toggle. The icon
that is displayed, is the mode that will appear after the
icon is tapped.
recordings. Tap a voice recording to play it.
5. On the top right corner of the display, is the recording
quality icon. Tap to toggle between Normal
and
High
quality recording.
For more information on downloading videos for your phone,
6. Press
for additional options.
Voice Recorder
Voice Search
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to
one minute long and then immediately share it using Wi-Fi
Direct, Messaging, Gmail, or via Bluetooth. Recording time
will vary based on the available memory within the phone.
The Google Voice Search application allows you to search the
web using only your voice.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Voice Search
.
2. When the Google Voice Search screen displays, speak
the word or words that you would like to search for on
the internet.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Voice recorder
.
2. To start recording, tap Record
microphone.
and speak into the
3. If the timer expires and the mic icon changes from red
to gray, tap the mic icon and speak the word or words
that you would like to search for on the internet.
Results are displayed on your phone.
3. During the recording process you can either tap Stop
to stop and save the recording or Pause
temporarily halt the recording. After pausing, tap
to
4. The following options are available at the bottom of
your screen:
Record
to resume recording. Once the audio
recording has stopped, the message is automatically
saved. Tap Cancel
without saving.
• Web: After selecting a different option, tap Web to return to the
original search results.
to cancel the recording
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Images: Displays images for your search.
3. Sign into your Google Account if you haven’t already
• News: Displays news items related to your search.
• More: After tapping More, sweep your screen to the left to see
additional options such as Shopping, Videos, Blogs,
Discussions, Books, and Applications.
4. The first time you access Isis Wallet, you will be taken
to the Play Store. Tap Update
5. Tap Accept & download
.
.
• Phone: Displays a phone number if applicable.
6. After the app is downloaded, tap Open to access the
Wallet
feature.
Isis Mobile Wallet uses NFC technology to let you pay for
purchases with just a tap of your phone. The Wallet holds
credit, debit, and loyalty cards while organizing offers, deals,
and promotions. Isis helps you manage your spending by
showing you card balances and recent purchases for most of
the cards in your Wallet.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Isis Mobile
Wallet.
WatchON
Important! Before initiating use, verify you have an active
Internet connection available (either mobile
network or Wi-Fi connection).
Note: Isis Mobile Wallet requires a special SIM card. See your
AT&T Customer Service representative for more
information.
Note: Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup,
confirm your TV is turned off.
For more information, refer to www.samsungwatchon.com
.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Wallet
.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
191
Initial Configuration
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
Customizing Your Remote
1. From the top of the main screen, tap
(Remote
Control) ➔ Continue
.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
WatchON
.
2. From the Select your TV brand screen, tap your TV’s
Note: If you are not connected to an active Wi-Fi, you may be
prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile
network. Click Connect to proceed.
manufacturer name.
•
If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector,
select from one of the following two options. Choose from
either Show other brands or I have a home projector
.
3. Select your desired country or region for your TV
Guide’s source listing.
3. Aim your device at the TV and tap Power) to
(
confirm the set up process completed successfully and
the correct TV IR codes were selected.
4. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and
set top box.
Note: The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10
5. From the Find your TV service screen, select a service
provider from the available channel listing.
6. From the Personalize screen, you can either follow the
on-screen prompts to personalize your desired content
or tap Skip to continue without customizing your
content.
seconds. Please do not press the button again.
4. If the TV turned on, tap Yes, this code 1 works
.
– or –
If the TV did not turn on after tapping
waiting 10 seconds, tap No, test next code 2 or
Send this code 1 again
(Power) and
7. Read the on-screen Peel Disclaimer agreement and tap
Agree to complete the set up process.
.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. From the Select your channel source screen, select the
entry that corresponds to your current channel control
method:
7. When prompted to Enable IR, tap More info to learn
how to configure your set top box to receive and
respond to IR controls.
• Set-top Box: selected when changing channels is done via a
receiver box. Channels are not changed via the TV remote but
rather through the receiver/box.
8. Only after completing the IR setup process and
programming your box, press
.
Note: This IR programming of your set top box is a one-time
process and once successful should not need to be
repeated.
• My xxx TV: selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV
and no box is used. Channels are changed directly on the TV by
using the TV remote and not a box’s remote.
9. If prompted to personalize your experience, follow the
Note: Try matching your current channel selection method.
on-screen instructions.
6. Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list.
Using WatchON
To change channels:
For example, DirectTV®.
•
If your brand does not appear in the list, tap Show other
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
brands and follow the on-screen instructions.
2. From the Home screen, tap
➔
WatchON
Remote
.
3. From the top of the main screen, tap
(
Important! You must configure your set top box for IR
communication with your device. If you do not
select More info below and follow the on-screen
instructions you may not be able to properly use
the application.
Control). This launches an on-screen remote control.
• Easy remote: provides the most common used control
features. Scroll down to view additional functions.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
193
4. In a single motion touch and drag up from the bottom-
right of the screen to access additional remote tabs
Choose from one of the following:
For additional information on the WatchON application,
press and then select Help
WatchOn Settings
.
• TV: provides access to control functions specific to your TV.
• [Set top box]: displays customized control specific to your
configured set top box. Ex: satellite dish remote control
functions.
�
From the main WatchON screen, press
and then
select an available on-screen option:
• Change room: allows you to select a previously configured
room.
5. From the remote screen press
and then
• Edit channels: allows you to add or remove channels from
your custom list. Press and hold a channel number to update
the channel entry.
tap Change room) to choose from different
(
receivers/boxes in different rooms. Ex: Living Room
box, Bedroom box, etc.
• Settings: provides access to the Samsung WatchON settings
menu.
6. Press
(Back) to return to the main menu.
Locating your favorite programming:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap
View) to reveal available media categories.
3. Select an available category.
– or –
• About: displays on-screen information about the application.
• Help: displays on-screen help information.
(Combined
Tap Channel Guide to display on your TV an on-screen
listing of available set top box shows.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To add a new room:
Personalize WatchON
Your device can be used to control boxes/receivers from
several rooms. You could go from controlling your set top box
in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do
the same.
You can personalize your application to do things such as
show content only from your selected media categories, or
add an additional room’s set top box.
To configure your Just for you settings:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
The Just for you option displays available content matching
your activated media categories. These categories can be
configured during your initial set up or at any later time.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap the On TV tab
3. Press
and then select Settings
➔
Add room.
4. Name the new room and tap Next
.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap
View) ➔ Just for you
3. From the On TV tab, press
Settings
4. Access parameters such as Basic profile
(Combined
5. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and
set top box.
.
and then select
.
Follow the steps from page 192 to complete the process.
,
Genres and
Sports to then configure and enable those parameters
you would like to show in the Just for you tab.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
195
YouTube
Note: It is not necessary to sign in to the YouTube site to view
content. However, if you wish to sign in to access
YouTube™ is a video sharing website on which users can
upload and share videos. The site is used to display a wide
variety of user-generated video content, including movie
clips, TV clips, and music videos, as well as video content
such as video blogging, informational shorts and other
original videos.
additional options, tap Sign in at the top left corner, enter
your YouTube or Google username and password, and
tap Sign in
.
YP
The YP (Yellowpages) application provides quick and ready
access to businesses, map locations, and storage of your
favorite searches. This application allows you to tap into local
businesses, locations, and events, connecting you to your
search in real-time.
Note: YouTube is a data-intensive feature. It is recommended
that you upgrade to a large data plan to avoid additional
data charges.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
YouTube
.
2. Tap the search field to search for specific videos,
Note: The first time you use YP, you will need to download the
updated application from the Play Store. When the Play
Store page displays, tap Update or Install then follow the
on-screen instructions. For more information, refer to
scroll down to browse through the main page
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional
options.
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or
tap the title link.
4. Press
for additional options.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
YP
.
2. Sign on to your Google account if you have not already
3. The first time you access YP, tap Take a Tour! to learn
more about the YP app, or tap Skip
4. Sign in using an email account or your Facebook
account or tap Skip to Home
.
.
5. Tap the What do you want to find? field to start a
search.
6. Results will be displayed.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to use the YP app.
8. Tap
to display additional options.
Applications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
197
Section 10: Health and Safety Information
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi
™
mode in the
2.4 and 5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices
operating within 5.15-5.25 GHz may only be used indoors,
not outside, in order to avoid interference with Mobile
Satellite Services (MSS). Therefore, this device is restricted
from being used outdoors when operating in frequencies
between 5.15-5.25 GHz.
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health
problems.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some
researchers have reported biological changes associated
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.
The majority of studies published have failed to show an
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell
phone and health problems.
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”
are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this
information before using your mobile device
.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication
includes the following information:
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health
effects.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not
be confused with the effects from other types of
electromagnetic energy.
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection
between RF and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies
that have shown a connection have failed.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the
genetic material.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community
has supported additional research to address gaps in
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic
radiation with relatively low frequencies.
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
199
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions
being drawn from this data. Additional information about
Interphone can be found at
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence
(MOBI-KIDS)
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy
from communication technologies including cell phones and
brain cancer in young people. This is an international
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be
found at
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA
continues to monitor developments in this field.
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users
(COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the
COSMOS study can be found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)
Program of the National Cancer Institute
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about
SEER can be found at
.
.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry
to take a number of steps, including the following:
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.
•
•
•
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to
the user; and
•
•
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
your head and the cell phone.
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect
the public.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets
and various types of body-worn accessories such as
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance
requirements when used against the head and against the
body.
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
201
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head
from RF Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
accessories which claim to shield the head from those
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory
attached to the phone.
Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure
apply to children and teenagers as well.
•
•
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
the head and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
Studies have shown that these products generally do not
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,
leading to an increase in RF absorption.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from
various sources can be obtained from the following
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):
•
FCC RF Safety Program:
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
•
•
•
•
•
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF
energy.
World Health Organization (WHO):
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
Health Protection Agency:
US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
203
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety
to give additional protection to the public and to account for
any variations in measurements.
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC
RF exposure guidelines. This mobile phone has a FCC ID
number: A3LSGHI337 [Model Number: SGH-i337] and the
specific SAR levels for this mobile phone can be found at the
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.
following FCC website: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/
The SAR information for this device can also be found on
Samsung’s website: http://www.samsung.com/sar
.
.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be
accessed online on the FCC's website through http://
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the
instructions on the website and it should provide values for
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional
SAR information can also be obtained at
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.
.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
FCC Part 15 Information to User
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS)
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS";
which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network ("PLAN")). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
Smart Practices While Driving
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
On the Road - Off the Phone
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe
operation of his or her vehicle.
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
205
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand
and address distractions.
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these
tips:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use a hands-free device;
Secure your phone within easy reach;
Place calls when you are not moving;
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
•
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in
an automobile:
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use
may be permitted in certain areas.
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
•
•
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear
to be working properly.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video
games while operating a vehicle.
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org
.
Battery Use and Safety
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or
damage. Most battery issues arise from improper
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the
continued use of damaged batteries.
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in
high temperatures.
•
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise
attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
207
•
Caution: Some applications or prolonged usage may increase
device temperature. Prolonged skin contact with a device that is
hot to the touch may produce skin discomfort or redness, or low-
temperature burns. If the device feels hot to the touch,
discontinue use and close all applications or turn off the device
until it cools. Always ensure that the phone has adequate
ventilation and air flow. Covering the device with bedding, your
body, thick clothing or any other materials that significantly affect
air flow may affect the performance of the phone and poses a
possible risk of fire or explosion, which could lead to serious
bodily injuries or damage to property.
•
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the
object causing the short-circuiting.
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and
recharge your battery only with
Samsung-approved chargers which are
specifically designed for your phone.
•
•
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone
or the battery may explode when overheated.
WARNING!
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized
service center.
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or
chargers.
.
•
•
Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way
.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or
.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung
mobile device by working with respected take-back
companies in every state in the country.
Drop It Off
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these
locations may be found at:
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious
.
hazard
.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted
at these locations for no fee.
Samsung Mobile Products and
Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories.
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional
information regarding specific locations may be found at:
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.
.
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
209
Mail It In
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety
instructions per UL guidelines:
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.
Just go to
.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved
recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
Or call, (877) 278-0799.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile
devices and batteries
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help
us protect the environment - recycle!
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE
POWER OUTLET.
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.
explode.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display / Touch-Screen
GPS
Please note the following information when using your
mobile device:
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance
of location-based technology on your mobile device.
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause
injury to you.
Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:
•
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of
your ability; and
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE
•
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency
responder instructs you.
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For
more information, please refer to the “Standard
Limited Warranty”.
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over
time. In some areas, complete information may not be
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
before following them. All users should pay attention to road
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
211
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).
Emergency numbers vary by location.
Emergency Calls
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.
4. Tap the
key.
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you
may first need to deactivate those features before you can
make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your
local cellular service provider. When making an emergency
call, remember to give all the necessary information as
accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device
may be the only means of communication at the scene of an
accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do
so.
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless
mobile device for essential communications (medical
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal
strength.
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile
device networks or when certain network services and/or
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service
providers.
Care and Maintenance
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many
years:
To make an emergency call:
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.
2. From the Home screen, tap
. The dialer is
displayed.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water
solution.
Shock or vibration
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and
could cause a fire or explosion.
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent
proper operation.
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the
mobile device.
Responsible Listening
Extreme heat or cold
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss
.
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /
113°F.
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume
settings for long durations may lead to permanent
noise-induced hearing loss.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Cleaning solutions
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
213
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of
sound, settings, and equipment.
•
•
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to
you can hear what you are listening to.
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.
•
•
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less
time is required before you hearing could be affected.
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound
normal.
You should follow some common sense recommendations
when using any portable audio device:
•
•
•
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into
an audio source.
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest
volume at which you can hear adequately.
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your
hearing.
•
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH)
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: [email protected]
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH
(1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
Internet:
National Institute on Deafness and Other
Communication Disorders
Email: [email protected]
Internet:
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/
default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
Email: [email protected]
Operating Environment
Internet:
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
215
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic
Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to
discuss alternatives.
•
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical
device, consult your health care provider.
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf•
.
Other Medical Devices
Implantable Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your
mobile device off in health care facilities when any
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential
interference with the device.
Persons who have such devices:
•
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is
turned ON;
Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that
has been added to your vehicle.
•
•
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
minimize the potential for interference;
•
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Posted Facilities
When your Device is Wet
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted
notices require you to do so.
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it
to a service center.
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling
point (service station).
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive
hearing devices.
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off
your vehicle engine.
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the
amount of interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
217
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or
a label located on the box.
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device
is relatively immune to interference noise.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to
evaluate it for your personal needs.
Under the current industry standard, American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two
values equals M5.
M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not
operate in telecoil mode.
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would
indicate excellent performance.
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in
telecoil mode.
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult
your service provider or phone retailer.
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
M2
= 5
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your
mobile device bill.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out
of the reach of small children.
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19
standard.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
HAC for Newer Technologies
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can
require you to stop using the mobile device if such
interference cannot be eliminated.
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with
hearing aids.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not
expressly approved by Samsung could void your warranty for
this equipment and void your authority to operate this
It is important to try the different features of this phone
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
219
equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas, and
chargers. The use of any unauthorized accessories may be
dangerous and void the mobile device warranty if said
accessories cause damage or a defect to the mobile device.
•
•
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its
parts, or accessories.
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could
result.
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
Other Important Safety Information
•
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to
the device.
•
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on
an aircraft.
•
•
•
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in
your vehicle are securely mounted.
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
•
•
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or
both.
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static
electricity before inserting the headset.
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
•
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device
immediately.
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]
•
Health and Safety Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
221
Section 11: Warranty Information
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the
Standard Limited Warranty
What is covered and for how long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material
and workmanship under normal use and service for the
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following
specified period of time after that date:
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception
Device
1 Year
1 Year
90 Days
1 Year
Battery(ies)*
Case/Pouch/Holster*
Other Device
Accessories*
*If applicable.
What is not covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the
Product.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for
which it is specified.
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product
and the seller’s name and address.
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new
Product.
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor
charges for the repair or return of such Product.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the
Warranty Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
223
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited
Warranty.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no
more than half of the total administrative, facility and
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited
Warranty.
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or
performance.
Warranty Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
225
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to
Severability
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited
Warranty.
[email protected], with the subject line: “Arbitration
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in
order to provide this service at no charge. If the
warranty has expired on the device, charges may
apply.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR
THE SOFTWARE.
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other
permanent storage media of one computer and use the
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,
and you may not make the Software available over a network
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to
change without notice. [111611]
End User License Agreement for
Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for software, owned by
Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party
suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which
includes computer software and may include associated
media, printed materials, "online" or electronic
documentation in connection with your use of this device
("Software").
Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source
licenses. The open source license provisions may override
some of the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable
open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices
section of the Settings menu of your device.
Warranty Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
227
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.
services or technologies to you and will not disclose this
information in a form that personally identifies you. At all
times your information will be treated in accordance with
Samsung’s Privacy Policy, which can be viewed at:
.
5. SOFTWARE UPDATES. Samsung may provide to you or
make available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and
add-on components (if any) of the Software, including bug
fixes, service upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices,
and updates and enhancements to any software previously
installed (including entirely new versions), (collectively
“Update”) after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
Software to improve the Software and ultimately enhance
your user experience with your device. This EULA applies to
all and any component of the Update that Samsung may
provide to you or make available to you after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide
other terms along with such Update. To use Software
provided through Update, you must first be licensed for the
Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the Update.
After the Update, you may no longer use the Software that
formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The updated
Software version may add new functions and, in some
limited cases, may delete existing functions.
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting
services with the Software.
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered
as part of the product support services related to the
Software provided to you, if any, such as IMEI (your device’s
unique identification number), device number, model name,
customer code, access recording, your device’s current SW
version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC (Mobile Network
Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this information
solely to improve their products or to provide customized
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the Update will be generally available, in some limited
circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by
your network carrier, and such Software updates will be
governed by your contractual relationship with your network
carrier.
network, which may result in additional charges depending
on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of some
features of the Software may be affected by the suitability
and performance of your device hardware or data access.
7. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer
must include all of the Software (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.
With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the
default setting in the System Update menu in the Setting),
your device downloads some Updates automatically from
time to time. Your device will, however, ask for your consent
before installing any Update If you choose to disable the
“Automatic Update” function, then you can check the
availability of new Updates by clicking on the “Check
Update” menu in the Setting. We recommend that you check
availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of
your device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for
the Update downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi
Only” option in the Setting. (Regardless of the option you
choose, the “Automatic Update” function downloads Updates
only through Wi-Fi connection.)
8. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.
You agree to comply with all applicable international and
national laws that apply to the Software, including all the
applicable export restriction laws and regulations.
6. Some features of the Software may require your device to
have access to the internet and may be subject to
restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider.
Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi-Fi
connection, the Software will access through your mobile
9. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the
Warranty Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
229
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all
copies, full or partial, of the Software.
SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER
THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING
THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY
SORT FROM SAMSUNG.
10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED
IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY
11. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party
ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED
BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE (WHETHER
INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this
mobile device. Samsung makes no representations
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung
has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and
agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of
such applications and is not responsible or liable for any
content, advertising, products, services, or other materials
on or available from such applications. You expressly
acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is
at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory
quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up
to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its
products and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be
OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN
"AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND
FROM SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE
LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS,
IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,
WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or
loss, including but not limited to any damage to the mobile
device or loss of data, caused or alleged to be caused by, or
in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party
content, products, or services available on or through any
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of
any third-party application is governed by such third party
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY
RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR
ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION
PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
membership registration (“Samsung Account”), and your
rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung
Account terms and conditions and privacy policies. There are
non-Samsung Account applications and services that require
your consent to their separate terms and conditions and
privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that
your use of such applications and services will be subject to
the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies.
13. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF
SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL
INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY
APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH
PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
12. SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS. Certain Samsung applications
and services may be included with, or downloaded to, this
mobile device. Many of them require Samsung Services
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING
Warranty Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
231
THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL
LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF
ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID
SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS
MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS,
15. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
the jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of
the United States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without
regard to its conflict of law provisions. This EULA shall not be
governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is
expressly excluded.
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION
.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or
difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of
the Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the
non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction
where you are a resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies (or an equivalent
type of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.
EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10,
11, 12 AND 13) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY
FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
14. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"
and "commercial software documentation" with only those
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE
SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH
FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR
JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or
consolidated with any other person’s or entity’s claim or
dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed
$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to
AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to
the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties,
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs.
Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any
court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also
applies to claims against Samsung’s employees,
representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from
the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this
dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung
no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first
consumer purchaser’s purchase of this device. To opt out,
you must send notice by e-mail to
[email protected], with the subject line: "Arbitration
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes
that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator
shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this
arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small
Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as
part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its attorney
fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that
the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case,
you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total
administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such
fees, whichever is less, and Samsung shall pay the
remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator
fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims,
Warranty Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
233
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling
1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the
date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the
device and providing the same information. These are the
only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of
this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute
resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or
its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of this license.
17. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral
or written communications, proposals and representations
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions
shall continue in full force and effect. [050113]
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Managing Address Book Contacts
Service Dialing Numbers 67
Using Contacts List 58
Address Book Options 61
Adobe PDF 177
Air Gesture
Activate 23
Quick Glance 24
Air gesture 126
AT&T DriveMode 162
AT&T FamilyMap 154
AT&T Locker 154
AT&T Messages 92
AT&T Mobile Locate 155
AT&T Navigator 155
AT&T Smart Wi-Fi 147
Audio Output 110
B
Back key 22
Backing up your data 131
Battery
charging 9
Display Percentage 11
Installing 7
Low Battery Indicator 11
Battery Use & Safety 207
Bigger Font
A
Abc mode 39
About Device 141
Accounts 129
Add accounts 129
Adding a New Contact
Idle Screen 56
Address Book 55
Adding a New Contact 56
Adding Pauses to Contact
Numbers 57
Copying a contact to the Phone 66
Copying Contacts to Phone 66
Copying Contacts to SIM Card 65
Deleting Address Book Entries 66
Deleting Contacts from SIM card
Dialing a Number 58
Favorites 64
Finding an Address Book Entry 58
Group Settings 63
Air view 128
Alarm 158
Amazon Kindle 153
Android Beam 103
Applications
Using the Camcorder 75
Using the Camera 68
World Clock 160
Applications settings
managing 138
running services 139
Setting 119
Blocking Mode 115
On 115
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bluetooth
Outgoing Headset Condition 112
Sending contacts 151
Books
Play Books 175
Box 186
Bubble
Options 84
Ending a Call 44
International Call 43
Making a Call 43
Manual Pause Dialing 43
Options During a Call 49
Putting a Call on Hold 51
Saving a recent call number to
Address Book 47
Settings 71
Taking Pictures 68
Care and Maintenance 212
Changing Your Settings 94
Charging battery 9
ChatON 93
Children and Cell Phones 202
Clock 158
Searching for a Number in
Address Book 54
Using the Speakerphone 53
Call rejection 110
Call Sound
Adding More Volume 49
Personalize 50
Camcorder 75
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
C
Calculator 156
Calendar 156
Contacts 55
Creating a Playlist 173
D
Deregister
Web Storage 187
Dialing Options 46
Display
Call Functions 43
3-WayCalling(Multi-PartyCalling)
Address Book 45
Adjusting the Call Volume 49
Answering a Call 46
Call Back Missed Call 47
Call Duration 49
Call forwarding 54
Call Log 47
Settings 71
Shooting Video 75
Camcorder Options
Camcorder Options after a Video is
Taken 75
Camera 68
Modes 70
icons 18
Using Negative Colors 119
Display / Touch-Screen 211
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Downloads 162
Draft Messages 81
Call waiting 54
Correcting the Number 44
Dialing a Recent Number 44
Quick Settings 71
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drive 162
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode 39
Exercising
Before You Start 178
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals 198
Gmail 90
Personalize Swype 124
Google
Settings 164
Google Chrome 158
Google Maps 169
Google Voice Typing 41
Google voice typing settings 124
Google+
Settings 164
GPS 211
Group
Adding a contact 63
Editing 64
Dropbox 186
Dual Camera 69
Dual View 69
E
Extra Volume 49
Editing a Picture 73
Email 88
Creating a Corporate Email
Account 89
Creating Additional Email
Accounts 90
Switching Between Email
Accounts 90
Emergency alert settings 87
Emergency Alerts (CMAS) 88
Emergency Calls 212
Making 44
With SIM 45
Without SIM 44
F
Family Map 154
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices 217
FCC Notice and Cautions 219
Featured Apps 163
Flipboard 163
Font Size
Changing 119
G
Gallery 76
viewing pictures 76
viewing videos 76
Gestures 126
Removing a contact 63
Group Settings
Editing a Caller Group 64
H
Hands-free Mode 116
Handwriting feature 40
Hangouts 165
Health and Safety Information 198
Home key 22
Entering Text
Changing the Text Entry Mode 39
Using 123Sym Mode 39
Using Abc Mode 39
Using Swype 41
Overview 23
Getting Started 6
Setting Up Your Phone 6
Voice mail 13
Home screen mode 110
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linking Contacts 59
Location 132
Location services settings 104
Lock Screen
Say Wake-Up Command 105
Shortcuts 105
Lookout Security 169
M
Maps 169
Memory Card 36
Memory Card Installation 8
Menu
key 22
Menu Navigation 22
Message
Register a Number as Spam 84
Thread Options 84
Message Options 81
Message Search 85
Messaging
Adding a Signature 87
Block Unknown Senders 87
Creating and Sending Text
Messages 80
Deleting a message 84
Draft 81
Gmail 90
Handwriting 40
Locked 81
Options 81
Scheduled Messages 81
Settings 85
Signing into Email 88
Signing into Gmail 90
Spam 81
Translate Text 82
Types of Messages 79
Installing 8
I
Icons
Indicator 18
Icons, description 18
In-Call Options 50
Incognito 167
Create Window 167
Exit Window 167
International Call 43
Internet 166
K
Keyboard Input Methods 120
Keyboard settings 120
Keypad
Changing Text Input 39
Kies via Wi-Fi 100
Kindle 153
Removing 8
Mobile Hotspot 100
Mobile TV 170
Mobile Web 166
Entering Text in the Mobile Web
Browser 166
L
Landscape 38
Language and input 120
Language and keyboard settings
select locale 120
Using Bookmarks 168
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mono
Audio Setup 119
Motion 126
Activate 24
Overview 23
Motions 126
Movies 76
Multi Window
Activate/Deactivate 26
Close App 31
Customizing 28
Increase App Window Size 31
Panel Relocation 27
Rearrange Apps 28
Removing Apps 28
Restoring Apps 29
Running Multiple Apps 29
Tab Repositioning 27
Using 26
Multimedia 68
Music 171
Music Options 171
Music Player
creating a playlist 173
playlists 173
removing music 173
settings 172
P
Palm Motion
Activate 24
On 24
PC Connections 151
Personal Localized Alerting Network
Phone
My Files 174
myAT&T 174
N
Navigation 175
command keys 22
context-sensitive menus 22
terms used 22
touch gestures 22
Navigator 155
Nearby devices 103
Negative Colors 119
NFC
Front View 15
icons 18
Rear View 17
Side View 16
Switching On/Off 11
Photo
Editing 73
Picture
Color Correction 74
Frame 74
On 77
Noise Reduction 51
Pictures 76
Gallery 76
Sharing 77
Places 175
O
Operating Environment 215
Optical Reader 175
Other Important Safety Information
Play Books 175
adding music 173
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Play Music 176
Play Newsstand 176
Play Store 177
Pointer speed 125
POLARIS Office 5 177
POLARIS® Office 5 177
Power Saving Mode 117
Powering
Off 11
On 11
Privacy settings
factory data reset 131
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile device 219
S
S Beam 103
On 77
Sharing Multiple Pictures 78
Sharing Pictures 77
S Memo 179
Creating a New Memo 179
S Translator 180
S Voice 181
Set Wake-Up Command 105
Samsung Hub
Samsung Mobile Products and Recy•
cling 209
scientific calculator 156
SD Card 37
Security settings
device administration 134
trusted credentials 136
Service Dialing Numbers 67
SIM card
installation 7
Installing 6
SkyDrive 186
Q
QWERTY keypad 38
Creating a New Account 182
Using 183
Smart Practices While Driving 205
Smart screen 128
Smart Switch 14
Smart Wi-Fi 147
Snooze 159
Software Update 142
Spam
Block Unknown Senders 87
Settings 87
R
Red Eye
Correction 74
Reducing Exposure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories 201
Reject list 48
Samsung Keyboard
Keyboard Swipe 121
Reset Settings 122
Samsung Link 154
Deregister Storage 187
Sharing Media 187
Web Storage Setup 186
Samsung Link Settings 186
Reset
factory data 131
Responsible Listening 213
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spam Messages
Assigning 81
Methods 38
numeric mode 39
symbol mode 39
USB Tethering 100
Using Favorites
Adding Favorites 168
Deleting a Favorite 168
Editing Favorites 168
Speakerphone Key 53
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certi•
fication Information 203
Standard Limited Warranty 222
Stopwatch 160
Swap 51
SwiftKeyFlow
Samsung Keyboard 121
SWYPE
entering text using 41
Swype
Timer 161
Automatic Answering 112
Touch Screen 12
Lock/Unlock 12
Transferring Large Files 77
Translate 82
TranslateMessage Bubble 84
Translator 180
Travel Charger 9
Using 10
V
Video 189
Video player 189
Voice control 129
Voice Mail
Accessing 13
From Another Phone 13
Setup 13
Voice Recorder 190
Volume 108
W
Wallet 191
Warranty Information 222
WatchON 191
Cellular Data 124
TTY Mode 115
Swype Keypad Settings 122
Swype Settings 42
Symbol/Numeric mode 39
Synchronization settings
auto-sync 104
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 210
Understanding Your Phone 14
Features of Your Phone 14
Front View 15
Rear View 17
Side Views 16
Unmute 50
USB settings
Synchronizing Accounts 130
Adding a New Room 195
Changing Channels 193
Configure Just For You 195
Customizing Your Remote 192
Initial Configuration 192
T
Tethering 100
Text Input
Abc mode 39
mass storage device 152
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|